Silence nds32 pic warnings
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set S/390
38 @set SPU
39 @set TICOFF
40 @set WIN32
41 @set XTENSA
42 @end ifset
43 @c man end
44
45 @ifnottex
46 @dircategory Software development
47 @direntry
48 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
49 @end direntry
50 @end ifnottex
51
52 @copying
53 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56 @end ifset
57 version @value{VERSION}.
58
59 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
60
61 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
62 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
63 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
66 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
67 @end copying
68 @iftex
69 @finalout
70 @setchapternewpage odd
71 @settitle The GNU linker
72 @titlepage
73 @title The GNU linker
74 @sp 1
75 @subtitle @code{ld}
76 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78 @end ifset
79 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80 @author Steve Chamberlain
81 @author Ian Lance Taylor
82 @page
83
84 @tex
85 {\parskip=0pt
86 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
88 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
89 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90 }
91 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92 @end tex
93
94 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
95 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
96 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
97
98 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
99 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
100 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
103 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
104 @c man end
105
106 @end titlepage
107 @end iftex
108 @contents
109 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
111 @ifnottex
112 @node Top
113 @top LD
114 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117 @end ifset
118 version @value{VERSION}.
119
120 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
121 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
123
124 @menu
125 * Overview:: Overview
126 * Invocation:: Invocation
127 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128 @ifset GENERIC
129 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130 @end ifset
131 @ifclear GENERIC
132 @ifset H8300
133 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134 @end ifset
135 @ifset Renesas
136 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
137 @end ifset
138 @ifset I960
139 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140 @end ifset
141 @ifset ARM
142 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143 @end ifset
144 @ifset M68HC11
145 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
146 @end ifset
147 @ifset HPPA
148 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
149 @end ifset
150 @ifset M68K
151 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152 @end ifset
153 @ifset MIPS
154 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
155 @end ifset
156 @ifset POWERPC
157 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
158 @end ifset
159 @ifset POWERPC64
160 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
161 @end ifset
162 @ifset S/390
163 * S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
164 @end ifset
165 @ifset SPU
166 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
167 @end ifset
168 @ifset TICOFF
169 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
170 @end ifset
171 @ifset WIN32
172 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
173 @end ifset
174 @ifset XTENSA
175 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
176 @end ifset
177 @end ifclear
178 @ifclear SingleFormat
179 * BFD:: BFD
180 @end ifclear
181 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
182
183 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
184 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
185 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
186 * LD Index:: LD Index
187 @end menu
188 @end ifnottex
189
190 @node Overview
191 @chapter Overview
192
193 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
194 @cindex what is this?
195
196 @ifset man
197 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
198 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
199 @c man end
200
201 @c man begin SEEALSO
202 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
203 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
204 @file{ld}.
205 @c man end
206 @end ifset
207
208 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
209
210 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
211 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
212 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
213
214 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
215 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
216 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
217
218 @ifset man
219 @c For the man only
220 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
221 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
222 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
223 @end ifset
224
225 @ifclear SingleFormat
226 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
227 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
228 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
229 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
230 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
231 @end ifclear
232
233 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
234 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
235 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
236 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
237 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
238
239 @c man end
240
241 @node Invocation
242 @chapter Invocation
243
244 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
245
246 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
247 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
248 you have many choices to control its behavior.
249
250 @c man end
251
252 @ifset UsesEnvVars
253 @menu
254 * Options:: Command Line Options
255 * Environment:: Environment Variables
256 @end menu
257
258 @node Options
259 @section Command Line Options
260 @end ifset
261
262 @cindex command line
263 @cindex options
264
265 @c man begin OPTIONS
266
267 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
268 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
269 @cindex standard Unix system
270 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
271 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
272 link a file @code{hello.o}:
273
274 @smallexample
275 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
276 @end smallexample
277
278 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
279 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
280 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
281 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
282
283 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
284 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
285 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
286 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
287 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
288 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
289 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
290 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
291 noted in the descriptions below.
292
293 @cindex object files
294 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
295 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
296 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
297 an option and its argument.
298
299 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
300 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
301 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
302 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
303 message @samp{No input files}.
304
305 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
306 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
307 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
308 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
309 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
310 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
311 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
312 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
313 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
314 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
315 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
316
317 For options whose names are a single letter,
318 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
319 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
320 option that requires them.
321
322 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
323 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
324 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
325 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
326 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
327 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
328 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
329 output.
330
331 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
332 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
333 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
334 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
335 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
336 accepted.
337
338 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
339 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
340 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
341 compiler driver) like this:
342
343 @smallexample
344 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
345 @end smallexample
346
347 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
348 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
349 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
350 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
351 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
352 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
353 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
354
355 @smallexample
356 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
357 @end smallexample
358
359 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
360 linker:
361
362 @table @gcctabopt
363 @include at-file.texi
364
365 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
366 @item -a @var{keyword}
367 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
368 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
369 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
370 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
371 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
372
373 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
374 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
375 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
376 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
377 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
378 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
379 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
380 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
381 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
382 interface.
383
384 @ifset I960
385 @cindex architectures
386 @kindex -A @var{arch}
387 @item -A @var{architecture}
388 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
389 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
390 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
391 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
392 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
393 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
394 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
395 family}, for details.
396
397 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
398 other architecture families.
399 @end ifset
400
401 @ifclear SingleFormat
402 @cindex binary input format
403 @kindex -b @var{format}
404 @kindex --format=@var{format}
405 @cindex input format
406 @cindex input format
407 @item -b @var{input-format}
408 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
409 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
410 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
411 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
412 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
413 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
414 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
415 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
416 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
417 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
418 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
419 @xref{BFD}.
420
421 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
422 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
423 linking object files of different formats), by including
424 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
425 particular format.
426
427 The default format is taken from the environment variable
428 @code{GNUTARGET}.
429 @ifset UsesEnvVars
430 @xref{Environment}.
431 @end ifset
432 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
433 @code{TARGET};
434 @ifclear man
435 see @ref{Format Commands}.
436 @end ifclear
437 @end ifclear
438
439 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
440 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
441 @cindex compatibility, MRI
442 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
443 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
444 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
445 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
446 @ifclear man
447 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
448 @end ifclear
449 @ifset man
450 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
451 @end ifset
452 Introduce MRI script files with
453 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
454 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
455 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
456 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
457
458 @cindex common allocation
459 @kindex -d
460 @kindex -dc
461 @kindex -dp
462 @item -d
463 @itemx -dc
464 @itemx -dp
465 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
466 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
467 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
468 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
469 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
470
471 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
472 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
473 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
474 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
475 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
476 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
477 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
478 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
479 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
480 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
481
482 @cindex entry point, from command line
483 @kindex -e @var{entry}
484 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
485 @item -e @var{entry}
486 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
487 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
488 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
489 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
490 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
491 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
492 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
493 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
494
495 @kindex --exclude-libs
496 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
497 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
498 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
499 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
500 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
501 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
502 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
503 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
504 be treated as hidden.
505
506 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
507 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
508 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
509 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
510 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
511 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
512 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
513 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
514 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
515 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
516 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
517 regardless of this option.
518
519 @cindex dynamic symbol table
520 @kindex -E
521 @kindex --export-dynamic
522 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
523 @item -E
524 @itemx --export-dynamic
525 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
526 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
527 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
528 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
529 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
530
531 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
532 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
533 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
534 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
535
536 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
537 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
538 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
539 linking the program itself.
540
541 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
542 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
543 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
544
545 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
546 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
547 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
548
549 @ifclear SingleFormat
550 @cindex big-endian objects
551 @cindex endianness
552 @kindex -EB
553 @item -EB
554 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
555
556 @cindex little-endian objects
557 @kindex -EL
558 @item -EL
559 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
560 @end ifclear
561
562 @kindex -f @var{name}
563 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
564 @item -f @var{name}
565 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
566 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
567 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
568 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
569 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
570
571 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
572 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
573 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
574 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
575 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
576 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
577 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
578 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
579 machine specific performance.
580
581 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
582 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
583
584 @kindex -F @var{name}
585 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
586 @item -F @var{name}
587 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
588 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
589 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
590 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
591 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
592
593 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
594 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
595 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
596 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
597 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
598 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
599 @var{name}.
600
601 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
602 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
603 object files.
604 @ifclear SingleFormat
605 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
606 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
607 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
608 environment variable.
609 @end ifclear
610 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
611 creating an ELF shared object.
612
613 @cindex finalization function
614 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
615 @item -fini=@var{name}
616 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
617 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
618 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
619 the function to call.
620
621 @kindex -g
622 @item -g
623 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
624
625 @kindex -G @var{value}
626 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
627 @cindex object size
628 @item -G @var{value}
629 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
630 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
631 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
632 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
633 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
634
635 @cindex runtime library name
636 @kindex -h @var{name}
637 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
638 @item -h @var{name}
639 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
640 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
641 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
642 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
643 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
644 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
645
646 @kindex -i
647 @cindex incremental link
648 @item -i
649 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
650
651 @cindex initialization function
652 @kindex -init=@var{name}
653 @item -init=@var{name}
654 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
655 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
656 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
657 function to call.
658
659 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
660 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
661 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
662 @item -l @var{namespec}
663 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
664 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
665 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
666 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
667 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
668 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
669
670 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
671 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
672 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
673 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
674 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
675 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
676 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
677 @var{filename}.
678
679 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
680 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
681 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
682 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
683 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
684 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
685
686 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
687 archives multiple times.
688
689 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
690
691 @ifset GENERIC
692 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
693 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
694 behaviour of the AIX linker.
695 @end ifset
696
697 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
698 @kindex -L @var{dir}
699 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
700 @item -L @var{searchdir}
701 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
702 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
703 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
704 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
705 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
706 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
707 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
708 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
709 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
710 option is specified.
711
712 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
713 prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
714 @samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
715
716 @ifset UsesEnvVars
717 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
718 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
719 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
720 @end ifset
721
722 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
723 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
724 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
725
726 @cindex emulation
727 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
728 @item -m @var{emulation}
729 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
730 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
731
732 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
733 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
734
735 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
736 configured.
737
738 @cindex link map
739 @kindex -M
740 @kindex --print-map
741 @item -M
742 @itemx --print-map
743 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
744 information about the link, including the following:
745
746 @itemize @bullet
747 @item
748 Where object files are mapped into memory.
749 @item
750 How common symbols are allocated.
751 @item
752 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
753 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
754 @item
755 The values assigned to symbols.
756
757 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
758 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
759 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
760 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
761 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
762 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
763 linker script containing:
764
765 @smallexample
766 foo = 1
767 foo = foo * 4
768 foo = foo + 8
769 @end smallexample
770
771 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
772 option is used:
773
774 @smallexample
775 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
776 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
777 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
778 @end smallexample
779
780 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
781 scripts.
782 @end itemize
783
784 @kindex -n
785 @cindex read-only text
786 @cindex NMAGIC
787 @kindex --nmagic
788 @item -n
789 @itemx --nmagic
790 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
791 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
792 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
793
794 @kindex -N
795 @kindex --omagic
796 @cindex read/write from cmd line
797 @cindex OMAGIC
798 @item -N
799 @itemx --omagic
800 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
801 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
802 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
803 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
804 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
805 specification published by Microsoft.
806
807 @kindex --no-omagic
808 @cindex OMAGIC
809 @item --no-omagic
810 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
811 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
812 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
813 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
814
815 @kindex -o @var{output}
816 @kindex --output=@var{output}
817 @cindex naming the output file
818 @item -o @var{output}
819 @itemx --output=@var{output}
820 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
821 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
822 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
823
824 @kindex -O @var{level}
825 @cindex generating optimized output
826 @item -O @var{level}
827 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
828 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
829 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
830 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
831 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
832 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
833 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
834
835 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
836 @item -plugin @var{name}
837 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
838 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
839 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
840 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
841 wish.
842
843 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
844 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
845 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
846 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
847 copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
848 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
849 just copy in the newest one.
850
851 @kindex --push-state
852 @cindex push state governing input file handling
853 @item --push-state
854 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
855 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
856 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
857
858 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
859 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
860 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
861 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
862 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
863 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
864
865 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
866 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
867 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
868 something as follows:
869
870 @smallexample
871 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
872 @end smallexample
873
874 @kindex --pop-state
875 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
876 @item --pop-state
877 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
878 flags governing input file handling.
879
880 @kindex -q
881 @kindex --emit-relocs
882 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
883 @item -q
884 @itemx --emit-relocs
885 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
886 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
887 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
888 in larger executables.
889
890 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
891
892 @kindex --force-dynamic
893 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
894 @item --force-dynamic
895 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
896 to VxWorks targets.
897
898 @cindex partial link
899 @cindex relocatable output
900 @kindex -r
901 @kindex --relocatable
902 @item -r
903 @itemx --relocatable
904 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
905 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
906 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
907 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
908 @code{OMAGIC}.
909 @c ; see @option{-N}.
910 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
911 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
912 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
913
914 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
915 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
916 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
917 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
918 with input files in other formats at all.
919
920 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
921
922 @kindex -R @var{file}
923 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
924 @cindex symbol-only input
925 @item -R @var{filename}
926 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
927 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
928 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
929 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
930 programs. You may use this option more than once.
931
932 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
933 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
934 the @option{-rpath} option.
935
936 @kindex -s
937 @kindex --strip-all
938 @cindex strip all symbols
939 @item -s
940 @itemx --strip-all
941 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
942
943 @kindex -S
944 @kindex --strip-debug
945 @cindex strip debugger symbols
946 @item -S
947 @itemx --strip-debug
948 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
949
950 @kindex --strip-discarded
951 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
952 @item --strip-discarded
953 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
954 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
955 Enabled by default.
956
957 @kindex -t
958 @kindex --trace
959 @cindex input files, displaying
960 @item -t
961 @itemx --trace
962 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
963
964 @kindex -T @var{script}
965 @kindex --script=@var{script}
966 @cindex script files
967 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
968 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
969 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
970 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
971 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
972 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
973 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
974 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
975 options accumulate.
976
977 @kindex -dT @var{script}
978 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
979 @cindex script files
980 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
981 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
982 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
983
984 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
985 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
986 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
987 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
988 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
989 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
990 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
991 @samp{gcc}).
992
993 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
994 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
995 @cindex undefined symbol
996 @item -u @var{symbol}
997 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
998 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
999 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1000 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1001 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1002 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1003
1004 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1005 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1006 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1007 instead.
1008
1009 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1010 @cindex symbols, require defined
1011 @cindex defined symbol
1012 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1013 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1014 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1015 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1016 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1017 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1018 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1019
1020 @kindex -Ur
1021 @cindex constructors
1022 @item -Ur
1023 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1024 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1025 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1026 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1027 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1028 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1029 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1030 @samp{-r} for the others.
1031
1032 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1033 @cindex orphan sections
1034 @cindex sections, orphan
1035 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1036 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1037 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1038
1039 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1040
1041 @table @code
1042 @item place
1043 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1044 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1045 @samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1046
1047 @item discard
1048 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1049 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1050
1051 @item warn
1052 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1053 issue a warning.
1054
1055 @item error
1056 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1057 @end table
1058
1059 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1060
1061 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1062 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1063 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1064 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1065 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1066 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1067 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1068 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1069 in a linker script.
1070
1071 @kindex -v
1072 @kindex -V
1073 @kindex --version
1074 @cindex version
1075 @item -v
1076 @itemx --version
1077 @itemx -V
1078 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1079 lists the supported emulations.
1080
1081 @kindex -x
1082 @kindex --discard-all
1083 @cindex deleting local symbols
1084 @item -x
1085 @itemx --discard-all
1086 Delete all local symbols.
1087
1088 @kindex -X
1089 @kindex --discard-locals
1090 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1091 @item -X
1092 @itemx --discard-locals
1093 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1094 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1095 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1096
1097 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1098 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1099 @cindex symbol tracing
1100 @item -y @var{symbol}
1101 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1102 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1103 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1104 to prepend an underscore.
1105
1106 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1107 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1108
1109 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1110 @item -Y @var{path}
1111 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1112 for Solaris compatibility.
1113
1114 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1115 @item -z @var{keyword}
1116 The recognized keywords are:
1117 @table @samp
1118
1119 @item bndplt
1120 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1121
1122 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1123 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1124 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1125 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1126 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1127 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1128 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1129 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1130 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1131 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1132 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1133
1134 @item combreloc
1135 @itemx nocombreloc
1136 Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1137 dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
1138
1139 @item common
1140 @itemx nocommon
1141 Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1142 link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1143
1144 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1145 Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1146 layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1147 using pages of this size.
1148
1149 @item defs
1150 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1151 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1152 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
1153
1154 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1155 @itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1156 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1157 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1158 by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1159 @samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1160 may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1161 selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1162 these options.
1163
1164 @item execstack
1165 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1166
1167 @item global
1168 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1169 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1170 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1171
1172 @item globalaudit
1173 This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1174 This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1175 setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1176 tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1177 the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command line options be run for
1178 all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
1179
1180 @item ibtplt
1181 Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1182 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1183
1184 @item ibt
1185 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1186 to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1187 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1188
1189 @item initfirst
1190 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1191 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1192 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1193 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1194 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1195 objects.
1196
1197 @item interpose
1198 Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1199 so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1200 libraries not so marked.
1201
1202 @item lazy
1203 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1204 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1205 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1206 Lazy binding is the default.
1207
1208 @item loadfltr
1209 Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
1210
1211 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1212 Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
1213
1214 @item muldefs
1215 Allow multiple definitions.
1216
1217 @item nocopyreloc
1218 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1219 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1220
1221 @item nodefaultlib
1222 Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1223 should ignore any default library search paths.
1224
1225 @item nodelete
1226 Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1227
1228 @item nodlopen
1229 Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
1230
1231 @item nodump
1232 Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1233
1234 @item noexecstack
1235 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1236
1237 @item noextern-protected-data
1238 Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1239 library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1240 used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1241 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1242 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1243 i386 and x86-64.
1244
1245 @item noreloc-overflow
1246 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1247 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1248 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1249
1250 @item now
1251 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1252 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1253 when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1254 function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1255 called.
1256
1257 @item origin
1258 Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
1259
1260 @item relro
1261 @itemx norelro
1262 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1263 specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1264 relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1265 than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
1266 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
1267
1268 @item separate-code
1269 @itemx noseparate-code
1270 Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1271 specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1272 be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1273 code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1274
1275 @item shstk
1276 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1277 to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1278 Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1279
1280 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1281 Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1282 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1283 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1284
1285 @item text
1286 @itemx notext
1287 @itemx textoff
1288 Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1289 relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1290 @samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
1291
1292 @item undefs
1293 Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1294 either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1295 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1296
1297 @end table
1298
1299 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1300
1301 @kindex -(
1302 @cindex groups of archives
1303 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1304 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1305 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1306 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1307
1308 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1309 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1310 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1311 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1312 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1313 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1314 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1315 resolved.
1316
1317 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1318 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1319 more archives.
1320
1321 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1322 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1323 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1324 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1325 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1326 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1327 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1328 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1329 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1330 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1331 restore the old behaviour.
1332
1333 @kindex --as-needed
1334 @kindex --no-as-needed
1335 @item --as-needed
1336 @itemx --no-as-needed
1337 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1338 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1339 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1340 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1341 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1342 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1343 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1344 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1345 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1346 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1347 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1348 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1349 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1350
1351 @kindex --add-needed
1352 @kindex --no-add-needed
1353 @item --add-needed
1354 @itemx --no-add-needed
1355 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1356 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1357 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1358 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1359
1360 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1361 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1362 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1363
1364 @kindex -Bdynamic
1365 @kindex -dy
1366 @kindex -call_shared
1367 @item -Bdynamic
1368 @itemx -dy
1369 @itemx -call_shared
1370 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1371 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1372 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1373 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1374 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1375 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1376
1377 @kindex -Bgroup
1378 @item -Bgroup
1379 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1380 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1381 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1382 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1383 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1384
1385 @kindex -Bstatic
1386 @kindex -dn
1387 @kindex -non_shared
1388 @kindex -static
1389 @item -Bstatic
1390 @itemx -dn
1391 @itemx -non_shared
1392 @itemx -static
1393 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1394 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1395 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1396 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1397 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1398 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1399 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1400 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1401 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1402 libraries.
1403
1404 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1405 @item -Bsymbolic
1406 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1407 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1408 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1409 within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1410 @option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1411 executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1412 the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1413 support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1414
1415 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1416 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1417 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1418 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1419 This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1420 when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1421 to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1422 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1423 libraries and position independent executables.
1424
1425 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1426 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1427 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1428 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1429 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1430 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1431 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1432 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1433 which support shared libraries.
1434
1435 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1436 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1437
1438 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1439 @item --dynamic-list-data
1440 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1441
1442 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1443 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1444 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1445 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1446
1447 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1448 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1449 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1450
1451 @kindex --check-sections
1452 @kindex --no-check-sections
1453 @item --check-sections
1454 @itemx --no-check-sections
1455 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1456 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1457 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1458 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1459 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1460 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1461 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1462 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1463 option.
1464
1465 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1466 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1467 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1468 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1469 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1470 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1471 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1472 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1473 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1474 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1475 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1476 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1477
1478 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1479 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1480 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1481 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1482 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1483 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1484 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1485 symbols.
1486
1487 @cindex cross reference table
1488 @kindex --cref
1489 @item --cref
1490 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1491 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1492 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1493
1494 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1495 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1496 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1497 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1498 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1499 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1500 symbol are listed.
1501
1502 @cindex common allocation
1503 @kindex --no-define-common
1504 @item --no-define-common
1505 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1506 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1507 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1508
1509 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1510 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1511 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1512 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1513 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1514 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1515 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1516 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1517 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1518 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1519
1520 @cindex group allocation in linker script
1521 @cindex section groups
1522 @cindex COMDAT
1523 @kindex --force-group-allocation
1524 @item --force-group-allocation
1525 This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1526 normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1527 default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1528 change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1529 command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1530 effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1531
1532 @cindex symbols, from command line
1533 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1534 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1535 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1536 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1537 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1538 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1539 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1540 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1541 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1542 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1543 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1544 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1545
1546 @cindex demangling, from command line
1547 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1548 @kindex --no-demangle
1549 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1550 @itemx --no-demangle
1551 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1552 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1553 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1554 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1555 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1556 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1557 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1558 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1559 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1560
1561 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1562 @kindex -I@var{file}
1563 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1564 @item -I@var{file}
1565 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1566 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1567 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1568 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1569 doing.
1570
1571 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1572 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1573 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1574 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1575 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1576 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1577
1578 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1579 @item --embedded-relocs
1580 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1581 that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1582 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1583 targets.
1584
1585 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1586 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1587 @item --fatal-warnings
1588 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1589 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1590 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1591
1592 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1593 @item --force-exe-suffix
1594 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1595
1596 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1597 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1598 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1599 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1600 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1601 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1602
1603 @kindex --gc-sections
1604 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1605 @cindex garbage collection
1606 @item --gc-sections
1607 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1608 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1609 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1610 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1611 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1612 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1613 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1614
1615 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1616 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1617 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1618 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1619 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1620 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1621 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1622 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1623 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1624
1625 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1626 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1627 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1628 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1629
1630 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1631 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1632 @cindex garbage collection
1633 @item --print-gc-sections
1634 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1635 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1636 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1637 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1638 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1639 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1640 line.
1641
1642 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1643 @cindex garbage collection
1644 @item --gc-keep-exported
1645 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1646 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1647 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1648 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1649 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1650 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1651 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1652 ELF format targets.
1653
1654 @kindex --print-output-format
1655 @cindex output format
1656 @item --print-output-format
1657 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1658 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1659 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1660
1661 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1662 @cindex memory usage
1663 @item --print-memory-usage
1664 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1665 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1666 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1667 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1668 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1669
1670 @smallexample
1671 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1672 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1673 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1674 @end smallexample
1675
1676 @cindex help
1677 @cindex usage
1678 @kindex --help
1679 @item --help
1680 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1681
1682 @kindex --target-help
1683 @item --target-help
1684 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1685
1686 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1687 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1688 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1689 @option{-M} option, above.
1690
1691 @cindex memory usage
1692 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1693 @item --no-keep-memory
1694 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1695 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1696 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1697 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1698 while linking a large executable.
1699
1700 @kindex --no-undefined
1701 @kindex -z defs
1702 @kindex -z undefs
1703 @item --no-undefined
1704 @itemx -z defs
1705 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1706 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1707 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1708 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1709 libraries being linked in.
1710
1711 The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1712
1713 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1714 @kindex -z muldefs
1715 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1716 @itemx -z muldefs
1717 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1718 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1719 first definition will be used.
1720
1721 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1722 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1723 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1724 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1725 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1726 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1727 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1728 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1729 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1730
1731 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1732 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1733 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1734 a shared library.
1735
1736 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1737 libraries specified at link time are that:
1738
1739 @itemize @bullet
1740 @item
1741 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1742 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1743 resolvable at load time.
1744 @item
1745 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1746 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1747
1748 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1749 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1750 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1751 appropriate memset function.
1752 @end itemize
1753
1754 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1755 @item --no-undefined-version
1756 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1757 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1758 will be issued instead.
1759
1760 @kindex --default-symver
1761 @item --default-symver
1762 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1763 exported symbols.
1764
1765 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1766 @item --default-imported-symver
1767 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1768 imported symbols.
1769
1770 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1771 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1772 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1773 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1774 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1775 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1776 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1777 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1778 inappropriate.
1779
1780 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1781 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1782 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1783 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1784
1785 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1786 @item --no-whole-archive
1787 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1788 archive files.
1789
1790 @cindex output file after errors
1791 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1792 @item --noinhibit-exec
1793 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1794 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1795 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1796 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1797
1798 @kindex -nostdlib
1799 @item -nostdlib
1800 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1801 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1802 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1803
1804 @ifclear SingleFormat
1805 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1806 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1807 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1808 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1809 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1810 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1811 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1812 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1813 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1814 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1815 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1816 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1817 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1818 @end ifclear
1819
1820 @kindex --out-implib
1821 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1822 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1823 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1824 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1825 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1826 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1827 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1828 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1829
1830 @kindex -pie
1831 @kindex --pic-executable
1832 @item -pie
1833 @itemx --pic-executable
1834 @cindex position independent executables
1835 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1836 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1837 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1838 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1839 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1840 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1841
1842 @kindex -qmagic
1843 @item -qmagic
1844 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1845
1846 @kindex -Qy
1847 @item -Qy
1848 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1849
1850 @kindex --relax
1851 @cindex synthesizing linker
1852 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1853 @cindex --no-relax
1854 @item --relax
1855 @itemx --no-relax
1856 An option with machine dependent effects.
1857 @ifset GENERIC
1858 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1859 @end ifset
1860 @ifset H8300
1861 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1862 @end ifset
1863 @ifset I960
1864 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1865 @end ifset
1866 @ifset XTENSA
1867 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1868 @end ifset
1869 @ifset M68HC11
1870 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1871 @end ifset
1872 @ifset NIOSII
1873 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1874 @end ifset
1875 @ifset POWERPC
1876 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1877 @end ifset
1878
1879 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1880 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1881 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1882 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1883 instructions, and combining constant values.
1884
1885 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1886 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1887 @ifset GENERIC
1888 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1889 family of processors.
1890 @end ifset
1891
1892 @ifset GENERIC
1893 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1894 but ignored.
1895 @end ifset
1896
1897 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1898 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1899
1900 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1901 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1902 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1903 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1904 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1905 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1906 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1907 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1908 @ifset GENERIC
1909 (such as VxWorks)
1910 @end ifset
1911 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1912 run-time memory.
1913
1914 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1915 or symbols needed for relocations.
1916
1917 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1918 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1919
1920 @ifset GENERIC
1921 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1922 @cindex runtime library search path
1923 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1924 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1925 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1926 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1927 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1928 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1929 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1930 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1931 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1932 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1933
1934 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1935 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1936 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1937 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1938 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1939 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1940 file systems.
1941
1942 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1943 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1944 the @option{-rpath} option.
1945 @end ifset
1946
1947 @ifset GENERIC
1948 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1949 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1950 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1951 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1952 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1953 of the input files.
1954
1955 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1956 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1957 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1958 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1959 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1960 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1961 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1962 appearing multiple times.
1963
1964 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1965 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1966 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1967 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
1968 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1969
1970 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1971 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1972 supported.
1973
1974 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1975 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1976 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1977 runtime linker would do.
1978
1979 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1980 libraries:
1981 @enumerate
1982 @item
1983 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1984 @item
1985 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1986 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1987 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1988 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1989 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1990 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1991 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1992 @item
1993 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1994 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1995 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1996 @item
1997 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1998 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1999 @item
2000 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
2001 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
2002 @item
2003 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2004 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2005 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2006 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2007 @item
2008 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2009 @item
2010 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2011 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
2012 @end enumerate
2013
2014 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2015 warning and continue with the link.
2016 @end ifset
2017
2018 @kindex -shared
2019 @kindex -Bshareable
2020 @item -shared
2021 @itemx -Bshareable
2022 @cindex shared libraries
2023 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2024 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
2025 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
2026 undefined symbols in the link.
2027
2028 @kindex --sort-common
2029 @item --sort-common
2030 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
2031 @itemx --sort-common=descending
2032 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2033 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2034 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2035 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2036 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2037 specified, then descending order is assumed.
2038
2039 @kindex --sort-section=name
2040 @item --sort-section=name
2041 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2042 patterns in the linker script.
2043
2044 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
2045 @item --sort-section=alignment
2046 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2047 patterns in the linker script.
2048
2049 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2050 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2051 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2052 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2053 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2054
2055 @kindex --split-by-file
2056 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2057 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2058 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2059 size of 1 if not given.
2060
2061 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2062 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2063 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2064 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2065 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2066 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2067 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2068 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2069 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2070 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2071 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2072 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2073
2074 @kindex --stats
2075 @item --stats
2076 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2077 as execution time and memory usage.
2078
2079 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2080 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2081 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2082 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2083 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2084
2085 @kindex --task-link
2086 @item --task-link
2087 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2088 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2089
2090 @kindex --traditional-format
2091 @cindex traditional format
2092 @item --traditional-format
2093 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2094 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2095 use the traditional format instead.
2096
2097 @cindex dbx
2098 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2099 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2100 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2101 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2102 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2103 combine duplicate entries.
2104
2105 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2106 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2107 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2108 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2109 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2110 line.
2111 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2112 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2113 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2114 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2115 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2116
2117 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2118 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2119 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2120 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2121 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2122 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2123 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2124 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2125 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2126
2127 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2128 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2129 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2130 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2131 byte of the text segment.
2132
2133 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2134 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2135 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2136 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2137 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2138 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2139
2140 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2141 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2142 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2143 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2144 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2145
2146 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2147 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2148 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2149 values for @samp{method}:
2150
2151 @table @samp
2152 @item ignore-all
2153 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2154
2155 @item report-all
2156 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2157
2158 @item ignore-in-object-files
2159 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2160 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2161
2162 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2163 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2164 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2165 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2166 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2167 command line.
2168 @end table
2169
2170 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2171 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2172
2173 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2174 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2175 can change this to a warning.
2176
2177 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2178 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2179 @item --dll-verbose
2180 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2181 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2182 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2183 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2184 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2185
2186 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2187 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2188 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2189 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2190 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2191 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2192 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2193 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2194 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2195 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2196 @xref{WIN32}.
2197
2198 @kindex --warn-common
2199 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2200 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2201 @item --warn-common
2202 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2203 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2204 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2205 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2206 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2207 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2208
2209 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2210
2211 @table @samp
2212 @item int i = 1;
2213 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2214 file.
2215
2216 @item extern int i;
2217 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2218 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2219 variable somewhere.
2220
2221 @item int i;
2222 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2223 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2224 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2225 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2226 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2227 a definition of the same variable.
2228 @end table
2229
2230 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2231 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2232 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2233 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2234 a common symbol.
2235
2236 @enumerate
2237 @item
2238 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2239 definition for the symbol.
2240 @smallexample
2241 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2242 overridden by definition
2243 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2244 @end smallexample
2245
2246 @item
2247 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2248 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2249 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2250 @smallexample
2251 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2252 overriding common
2253 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2254 @end smallexample
2255
2256 @item
2257 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2258 @smallexample
2259 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2260 of `@var{symbol}'
2261 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2262 @end smallexample
2263
2264 @item
2265 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2266 @smallexample
2267 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2268 overridden by larger common
2269 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2270 @end smallexample
2271
2272 @item
2273 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2274 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2275 encountered in a different order.
2276 @smallexample
2277 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2278 overriding smaller common
2279 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2280 @end smallexample
2281 @end enumerate
2282
2283 @kindex --warn-constructors
2284 @item --warn-constructors
2285 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2286 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2287 detect the use of global constructors.
2288
2289 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2290 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2291 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2292 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2293 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2294 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2295 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2296 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2297 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2298 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2299 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2300 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2301 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2302
2303 @kindex --warn-once
2304 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2305 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2306 @item --warn-once
2307 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2308 which refers to it.
2309
2310 @kindex --warn-section-align
2311 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2312 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2313 @item --warn-section-align
2314 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2315 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2316 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2317 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2318 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2319
2320 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2321 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2322 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2323
2324 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2325 @item --warn-alternate-em
2326 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2327
2328 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2329 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2330 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2331 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2332 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2333
2334 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2335 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2336 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2337 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2338
2339 @kindex --whole-archive
2340 @cindex including an entire archive
2341 @item --whole-archive
2342 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2343 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2344 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2345 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2346 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2347 library. This option may be used more than once.
2348
2349 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2350 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2351 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2352 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2353 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2354
2355 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2356 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2357 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2358 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2359 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2360 @var{symbol}.
2361
2362 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2363 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2364 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2365 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2366
2367 Here is a trivial example:
2368
2369 @smallexample
2370 void *
2371 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2372 @{
2373 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2374 return __real_malloc (c);
2375 @}
2376 @end smallexample
2377
2378 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2379 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2380 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2381 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2382
2383 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2384 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2385 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2386 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2387 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2388
2389 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2390 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2391 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2392 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2393 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2394 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2395 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2396
2397 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2398 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2399 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2400 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2401 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2402
2403 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2404 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2405 @item --enable-new-dtags
2406 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2407 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2408 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2409 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2410 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2411 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2412 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2413 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2414
2415 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2416 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2417 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2418 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2419 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2420 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2421 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2422
2423 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2424 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2425 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2426 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2427 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2428 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2429 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2430
2431 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2432 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2433 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2434 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2435 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2436 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2437 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2438 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2439 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2440 compressed using zlib.
2441
2442 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2443 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2444 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2445 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2446 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2447 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2448
2449 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2450 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2451
2452 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2453 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2454 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2455 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2456
2457 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2458 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2459 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2460 @option{--help} option.
2461
2462 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2463 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2464 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2465 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2466 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2467 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2468
2469 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2470 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2471 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2472 has been used.
2473
2474 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2475 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2476
2477 @kindex --build-id
2478 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2479 @item --build-id
2480 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2481 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2482 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2483 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2484 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2485 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2486 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2487 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2488 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2489 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2490 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2491
2492 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2493 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2494 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2495 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2496 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2497 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2498
2499 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2500 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2501 @end table
2502
2503 @c man end
2504
2505 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2506
2507 @c man begin OPTIONS
2508
2509 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2510 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2511 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2512 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2513 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2514 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2515 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2516 object file).
2517
2518 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2519 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2520 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2521 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2522
2523 @table @gcctabopt
2524
2525 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2526 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2527 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2528 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2529 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2530
2531 @kindex --base-file
2532 @item --base-file @var{file}
2533 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2534 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2535 @file{dlltool}.
2536 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2537
2538 @kindex --dll
2539 @item --dll
2540 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2541 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2542 file.
2543 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2544
2545 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2546 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2547 @item --enable-long-section-names
2548 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2549 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2550 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2551 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2552 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2553 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2554 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2555 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2556 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2557 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2558 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2559 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2560 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2561 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2562 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2563 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2564 image and not stripping symbols.
2565 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2566
2567 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2568 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2569 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2570 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2571 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2572 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2573 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2574 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2575 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2576 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2577 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2578 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2579 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2580 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2581 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2582 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2583 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2584 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2585
2586 @kindex --leading-underscore
2587 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2588 @item --leading-underscore
2589 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2590 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2591 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2592 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2593
2594 @cindex DLLs, creating
2595 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2596 @item --export-all-symbols
2597 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2598 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2599 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2600 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2601 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2602 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2603 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2604 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2605 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2606 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2607 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2608 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2609 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2610 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2611 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2612 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2613 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2614 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2615 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2616 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2617 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2618 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2619 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2620
2621 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2622 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2623 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2624 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2625 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2626
2627 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2628 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2629 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2630 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2631
2632 @kindex --file-alignment
2633 @item --file-alignment
2634 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2635 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2636 512.
2637 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2638
2639 @cindex heap size
2640 @kindex --heap
2641 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2642 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2643 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2644 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2645 committed.
2646 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2647
2648 @cindex image base
2649 @kindex --image-base
2650 @item --image-base @var{value}
2651 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2652 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2653 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2654 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2655 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2656 for dlls.
2657 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2658
2659 @kindex --kill-at
2660 @item --kill-at
2661 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2662 symbols before they are exported.
2663 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2664
2665 @kindex --large-address-aware
2666 @item --large-address-aware
2667 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2668 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2669 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2670 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2671 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2672 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2673
2674 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2675 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2676 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2677 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2678 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2679 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2680 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2681
2682 @kindex --major-image-version
2683 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2684 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2685 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2686
2687 @kindex --major-os-version
2688 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2689 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2690 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2691
2692 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2693 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2694 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2695 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2696
2697 @kindex --minor-image-version
2698 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2699 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2700 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2701
2702 @kindex --minor-os-version
2703 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2704 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2705 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2706
2707 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2708 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2709 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2710 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2711
2712 @cindex DEF files, creating
2713 @cindex DLLs, creating
2714 @kindex --output-def
2715 @item --output-def @var{file}
2716 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2717 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2718 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2719 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2720 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2721 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2722
2723 @cindex DLLs, creating
2724 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2725 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2726 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2727 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2728 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2729 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2730 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2731 execution are avoided.
2732 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2733
2734 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2735 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2736 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2737 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2738 default.
2739 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2740
2741 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2742 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2743 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2744 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2745 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2746 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2747 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2748 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2749 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2750 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2751
2752 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2753 @item --enable-auto-import
2754 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2755 DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2756 mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2757 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2758
2759 The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2760 feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2761
2762 Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2763 of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2764 PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
2765
2766 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2767 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2768 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2769 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2770 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2771
2772 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2773 see this message:
2774
2775 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2776 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2777
2778 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2779 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2780 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2781 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2782 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2783 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2784 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2785 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2786 the warning, and exit.
2787
2788 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2789 data type of the exported variable:
2790
2791 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2792 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2793 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2794
2795 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2796 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2797 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2798 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2799
2800 @example
2801 extern type extern_array[];
2802 extern_array[1] -->
2803 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2804 @end example
2805
2806 or
2807
2808 @example
2809 extern type extern_array[];
2810 extern_array[1] -->
2811 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2812 @end example
2813
2814 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2815 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2816
2817 @example
2818 extern struct s extern_struct;
2819 extern_struct.field -->
2820 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2821 @end example
2822
2823 or
2824
2825 @example
2826 extern long long extern_ll;
2827 extern_ll -->
2828 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2829 @end example
2830
2831 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2832 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2833 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2834 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2835 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2836 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2837 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2838 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2839
2840 Original:
2841 @example
2842 --foo.h
2843 extern int arr[];
2844 --foo.c
2845 #include "foo.h"
2846 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2847 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2848 @}
2849 @end example
2850
2851 Solution 1:
2852 @example
2853 --foo.h
2854 extern int arr[];
2855 --foo.c
2856 #include "foo.h"
2857 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2858 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2859 volatile int *parr = arr;
2860 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2861 @}
2862 @end example
2863
2864 Solution 2:
2865 @example
2866 --foo.h
2867 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2868 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2869 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2870 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2871 #else
2872 #define FOO_IMPORT
2873 #endif
2874 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2875 --foo.c
2876 #include "foo.h"
2877 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2878 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2879 @}
2880 @end example
2881
2882 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2883 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2884 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2885 functions).
2886
2887 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2888 @item --disable-auto-import
2889 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2890 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2891 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2892
2893 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2894 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2895 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2896 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2897 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2898 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2899 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2900
2901 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2902 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2903 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
2904 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2905
2906 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2907 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2908 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2909 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2910
2911 @kindex --section-alignment
2912 @item --section-alignment
2913 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2914 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2915 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2916
2917 @cindex stack size
2918 @kindex --stack
2919 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2920 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2921 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2922 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2923 committed.
2924 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2925
2926 @kindex --subsystem
2927 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2928 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2929 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2930 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2931 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2932 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2933 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2934 @var{which}.
2935 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2936
2937 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2938 of the PE file header:
2939 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2940
2941 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2942 @item --high-entropy-va
2943 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2944 (ASLR).
2945
2946 @kindex --dynamicbase
2947 @item --dynamicbase
2948 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2949 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2950 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2951
2952 @kindex --forceinteg
2953 @item --forceinteg
2954 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2955
2956 @kindex --nxcompat
2957 @item --nxcompat
2958 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2959 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2960
2961 @kindex --no-isolation
2962 @item --no-isolation
2963 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2964
2965 @kindex --no-seh
2966 @item --no-seh
2967 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2968 this image.
2969
2970 @kindex --no-bind
2971 @item --no-bind
2972 Do not bind this image.
2973
2974 @kindex --wdmdriver
2975 @item --wdmdriver
2976 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2977
2978 @kindex --tsaware
2979 @item --tsaware
2980 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2981
2982 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2983 @item --insert-timestamp
2984 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2985 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2986 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2987 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2988 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
2989 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2990 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2991 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
2992 identically.
2993 @end table
2994
2995 @c man end
2996
2997 @ifset C6X
2998 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2999
3000 @c man begin OPTIONS
3001
3002 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3003 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3004 all executables use an index of 0.
3005
3006 @table @gcctabopt
3007
3008 @kindex --dsbt-size
3009 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
3010 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
3011 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3012 entries.
3013
3014 @kindex --dsbt-index
3015 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3016 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3017 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3018 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3019 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3020
3021 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3022 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3023 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3024
3025 @end table
3026
3027 @c man end
3028 @end ifset
3029
3030 @ifset M68HC11
3031 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3032
3033 @c man begin OPTIONS
3034
3035 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3036 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3037
3038 @table @gcctabopt
3039
3040 @kindex --no-trampoline
3041 @item --no-trampoline
3042 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3043 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3044 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3045
3046 @kindex --bank-window
3047 @item --bank-window @var{name}
3048 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3049 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3050 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3051 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3052
3053 @end table
3054
3055 @c man end
3056 @end ifset
3057
3058 @ifset M68K
3059 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3060
3061 @c man begin OPTIONS
3062
3063 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3064 when linking for 68K targets.
3065
3066 @table @gcctabopt
3067
3068 @kindex --got
3069 @item --got=@var{type}
3070 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3071 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3072 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3073 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3074
3075 @end table
3076
3077 @c man end
3078 @end ifset
3079
3080 @ifset MIPS
3081 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3082
3083 @c man begin OPTIONS
3084
3085 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3086 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3087 linking for MIPS targets.
3088
3089 @table @gcctabopt
3090
3091 @kindex --insn32
3092 @item --insn32
3093 @kindex --no-insn32
3094 @itemx --no-insn32
3095 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3096 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3097 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3098 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3099 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3100 possible.
3101
3102 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3103 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3104 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3105 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3106 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3107 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3108 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3109 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3110 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3111 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3112 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3113 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3114 an error.
3115
3116 @end table
3117
3118 @c man end
3119 @end ifset
3120
3121 @ifset UsesEnvVars
3122 @node Environment
3123 @section Environment Variables
3124
3125 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3126
3127 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3128 @ifclear SingleFormat
3129 @code{GNUTARGET},
3130 @end ifclear
3131 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3132
3133 @ifclear SingleFormat
3134 @kindex GNUTARGET
3135 @cindex default input format
3136 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3137 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3138 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3139 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3140 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3141 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3142 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3143 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3144 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3145 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3146 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3147 @end ifclear
3148
3149 @kindex LDEMULATION
3150 @cindex default emulation
3151 @cindex emulation, default
3152 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3153 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3154 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3155 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3156 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3157 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3158 linker was configured.
3159
3160 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3161 @cindex demangling, default
3162 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3163 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3164 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3165 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3166 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3167 options.
3168
3169 @c man end
3170 @end ifset
3171
3172 @node Scripts
3173 @chapter Linker Scripts
3174
3175 @cindex scripts
3176 @cindex linker scripts
3177 @cindex command files
3178 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3179 written in the linker command language.
3180
3181 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3182 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3183 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3184 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3185 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3186 described below.
3187
3188 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3189 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3190 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3191 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3192 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3193
3194 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3195 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3196 default linker script.
3197
3198 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3199 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3200 Linker Scripts}.
3201
3202 @menu
3203 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3204 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3205 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3206 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3207 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3208 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3209 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3210 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3211 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3212 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3213 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3214 @end menu
3215
3216 @node Basic Script Concepts
3217 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3218 @cindex linker script concepts
3219 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3220 describe the linker script language.
3221
3222 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3223 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3224 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3225 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3226 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3227 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3228 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3229 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3230
3231 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3232 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3233 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3234 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3235 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3236 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3237 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3238 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3239 of debugging information.
3240
3241 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3242 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3243 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3244 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3245 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3246 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3247 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3248 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3249 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3250 RAM address would be the VMA.
3251
3252 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3253 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3254
3255 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3256 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3257 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3258 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3259 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3260 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3261 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3262
3263 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3264 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3265 option.
3266
3267 @node Script Format
3268 @section Linker Script Format
3269 @cindex linker script format
3270 Linker scripts are text files.
3271
3272 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3273 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3274 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3275 generally ignored.
3276
3277 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3278 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3279 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3280 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3281 file name.
3282
3283 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3284 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3285 to whitespace.
3286
3287 @node Simple Example
3288 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3289 @cindex linker script example
3290 @cindex example of linker script
3291 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3292
3293 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3294 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3295 memory layout of the output file.
3296
3297 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3298 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3299 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3300 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3301 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3302 your input files.
3303
3304 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3305 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3306 linker script which will do that:
3307 @smallexample
3308 SECTIONS
3309 @{
3310 . = 0x10000;
3311 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3312 . = 0x8000000;
3313 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3314 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3315 @}
3316 @end smallexample
3317
3318 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3319 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3320 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3321
3322 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3323 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3324 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3325 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3326 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3327 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3328 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3329
3330 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3331 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3332 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3333 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3334 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3335 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3336
3337 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3338 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3339 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3340
3341 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3342 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3343 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3344 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3345 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3346 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3347 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3348
3349 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3350 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3351 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3352 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3353 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3354 sections.
3355
3356 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3357
3358 @node Simple Commands
3359 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3360 @cindex linker script simple commands
3361 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3362
3363 @menu
3364 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3365 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3366 @ifclear SingleFormat
3367 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3368 @end ifclear
3369
3370 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3371 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3372 @end menu
3373
3374 @node Entry Point
3375 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3376 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3377 @cindex start of execution
3378 @cindex first instruction
3379 @cindex entry point
3380 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3381 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3382 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3383 @smallexample
3384 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3385 @end smallexample
3386
3387 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3388 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3389 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3390 @itemize @bullet
3391 @item
3392 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3393 @item
3394 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3395 @item
3396 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3397 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3398 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3399 @item
3400 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3401 @item
3402 The address @code{0}.
3403 @end itemize
3404
3405 @node File Commands
3406 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3407 @cindex linker script file commands
3408 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3409
3410 @table @code
3411 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3412 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3413 @cindex including a linker script
3414 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3415 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3416 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3417 10 levels deep.
3418
3419 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3420 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3421
3422 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3423 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3424 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3425 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3426 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3427 @cindex linker script input object files
3428 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3429 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3430
3431 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3432 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3433 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3434
3435 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3436 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3437
3438 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3439 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3440 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3441 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3442 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3443 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3444 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3445 as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3446 path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3447 @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3448
3449 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3450 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3451 @samp{-l}.
3452
3453 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3454 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3455 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3456
3457 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3458 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3459 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3460 @cindex grouping input files
3461 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3462 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3463 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3464 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3465
3466 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3467 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3468 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3469 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3470 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3471 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3472 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3473 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3474 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3475 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3476 setting afterwards.
3477
3478 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3479 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3480 @cindex output file name in linker script
3481 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3482 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3483 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3484 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3485 precedence.
3486
3487 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3488 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3489
3490 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3491 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3492 @cindex library search path in linker script
3493 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3494 @cindex search path in linker script
3495 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3496 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3497 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3498 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3499 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3500 the command line option are searched first.
3501
3502 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3503 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3504 @cindex first input file
3505 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3506 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3507 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3508 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3509 first file.
3510 @end table
3511
3512 @ifclear SingleFormat
3513 @node Format Commands
3514 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3515 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3516
3517 @table @code
3518 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3519 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3520 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3521 @cindex output file format in linker script
3522 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3523 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3524 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3525 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3526 line option takes precedence.
3527
3528 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3529 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3530 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3531 desired endianness.
3532
3533 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3534 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3535 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3536 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3537
3538 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3539 command:
3540 @smallexample
3541 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3542 @end smallexample
3543 This says that the default format for the output file is
3544 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3545 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3546 format.
3547
3548 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3549 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3550 @cindex input file format in linker script
3551 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3552 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3553 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3554 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3555 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3556 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3557 @end table
3558 @end ifclear
3559
3560 @node REGION_ALIAS
3561 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3562 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3563 @cindex region alias
3564 @cindex region names
3565
3566 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3567 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3568
3569 @smallexample
3570 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3571 @end smallexample
3572
3573 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3574 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3575 to memory regions. An example follows.
3576
3577 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3578 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3579 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3580 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3581 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3582 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3583 sections:
3584
3585 @itemize @bullet
3586 @item
3587 @code{.text} program code;
3588 @item
3589 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3590 @item
3591 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3592 @item
3593 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3594 @end itemize
3595
3596 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3597 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3598 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3599 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3600 @code{C}:
3601 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3602 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3603 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3604 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3605 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3606 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3607 @end multitable
3608 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3609 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3610 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3611 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3612
3613 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3614 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3615 memory layout:
3616 @smallexample
3617 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3618
3619 SECTIONS
3620 @{
3621 .text :
3622 @{
3623 *(.text)
3624 @} > REGION_TEXT
3625 .rodata :
3626 @{
3627 *(.rodata)
3628 rodata_end = .;
3629 @} > REGION_RODATA
3630 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3631 @{
3632 data_start = .;
3633 *(.data)
3634 @} > REGION_DATA
3635 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3636 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3637 .bss :
3638 @{
3639 *(.bss)
3640 @} > REGION_BSS
3641 @}
3642 @end smallexample
3643
3644 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3645 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3646 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3647 @table @code
3648 @item A
3649 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3650 @smallexample
3651 MEMORY
3652 @{
3653 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3654 @}
3655
3656 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3657 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3658 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3659 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3660 @end smallexample
3661 @item B
3662 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3663 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3664 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3665 @smallexample
3666 MEMORY
3667 @{
3668 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3669 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3670 @}
3671
3672 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3673 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3674 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3675 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3676 @end smallexample
3677 @item C
3678 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3679 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3680 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3681 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3682 @smallexample
3683 MEMORY
3684 @{
3685 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3686 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3687 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3688 @}
3689
3690 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3691 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3692 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3693 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3694 @end smallexample
3695 @end table
3696
3697 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3698 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3699 necessary:
3700 @smallexample
3701 #include <string.h>
3702
3703 extern char data_start [];
3704 extern char data_size [];
3705 extern char data_load_start [];
3706
3707 void copy_data(void)
3708 @{
3709 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3710 @{
3711 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3712 @}
3713 @}
3714 @end smallexample
3715
3716 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3717 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3718 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3719
3720 @table @code
3721 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3722 @kindex ASSERT
3723 @cindex assertion in linker script
3724 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3725 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3726
3727 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3728 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3729 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3730 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3731 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3732
3733 @smallexample
3734 .stack :
3735 @{
3736 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3737 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3738 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3739 @}
3740 @end smallexample
3741
3742 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3743 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3744 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3745
3746 @smallexample
3747 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3748 .stack :
3749 @{
3750 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3751 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3752 @}
3753 @end smallexample
3754
3755 will work.
3756
3757 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3758 @kindex EXTERN
3759 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3760 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3761 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3762 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3763 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3764 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3765
3766 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3767 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3768 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3769 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3770 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3771 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3772
3773 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3774 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3775 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3776 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3777 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3778 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3779
3780 @item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3781 @kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3782 @cindex group allocation in linker script
3783 @cindex section groups
3784 @cindex COMDAT
3785 This command has the same effect as the
3786 @samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3787 @command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3788 and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3789 specified (@samp{-r}).
3790
3791 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3792 @kindex INSERT
3793 @cindex insert user script into default script
3794 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3795 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3796 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3797 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3798 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3799 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3800 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3801 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3802 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3803 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3804 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3805 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3806 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3807
3808 @smallexample
3809 SECTIONS
3810 @{
3811 OVERLAY :
3812 @{
3813 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3814 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3815 @}
3816 @}
3817 INSERT AFTER .text;
3818 @end smallexample
3819
3820 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3821 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3822 @cindex cross references
3823 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3824 references among certain output sections.
3825
3826 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3827 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3828 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3829 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3830 a function defined in the other section.
3831
3832 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3833 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3834 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3835 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3836 names.
3837
3838 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3839 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3840 @cindex cross references
3841 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3842 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3843
3844 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3845 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3846 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3847 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3848 must never call back.
3849
3850 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3851 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3852 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3853 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3854 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3855 names, not input section names.
3856
3857 @ifclear SingleFormat
3858 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3859 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3860 @cindex machine architecture
3861 @cindex architecture
3862 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3863 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3864 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3865 the @samp{-f} option.
3866 @end ifclear
3867
3868 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3869 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3870 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3871 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3872 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3873 @xref{Expression Section}.
3874 @end table
3875
3876 @node Assignments
3877 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3878 @cindex assignment in scripts
3879 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3880 @cindex variables, defining
3881 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3882 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3883
3884 @menu
3885 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3886 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3887 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3888 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3889 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3890 @end menu
3891
3892 @node Simple Assignments
3893 @subsection Simple Assignments
3894
3895 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3896
3897 @table @code
3898 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3899 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3900 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3901 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3902 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3903 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3904 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3905 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3906 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3907 @end table
3908
3909 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3910 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3911 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3912
3913 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3914 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3915
3916 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3917
3918 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3919
3920 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3921 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3922 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3923
3924 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3925 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3926
3927 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3928 assignments may be used:
3929
3930 @smallexample
3931 floating_point = 0;
3932 SECTIONS
3933 @{
3934 .text :
3935 @{
3936 *(.text)
3937 _etext = .;
3938 @}
3939 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3940 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3941 @}
3942 @end smallexample
3943 @noindent
3944 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3945 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3946 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3947 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3948 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3949
3950 @node HIDDEN
3951 @subsection HIDDEN
3952 @cindex HIDDEN
3953 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3954 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3955
3956 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3957 @code{HIDDEN}:
3958
3959 @smallexample
3960 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3961 SECTIONS
3962 @{
3963 .text :
3964 @{
3965 *(.text)
3966 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3967 @}
3968 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3969 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3970 @}
3971 @end smallexample
3972 @noindent
3973 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3974
3975 @node PROVIDE
3976 @subsection PROVIDE
3977 @cindex PROVIDE
3978 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3979 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3980 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3981 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3982 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3983 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3984 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3985 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3986
3987 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3988 @smallexample
3989 SECTIONS
3990 @{
3991 .text :
3992 @{
3993 *(.text)
3994 _etext = .;
3995 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3996 @}
3997 @}
3998 @end smallexample
3999
4000 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4001 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4002 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4003 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4004 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4005 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4006
4007 Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4008 defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4009 that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4010 when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4011 @samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4012
4013 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4014 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4015 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4016 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4017 hidden and won't be exported.
4018
4019 @node Source Code Reference
4020 @subsection Source Code Reference
4021
4022 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4023 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4024 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4025 symbol that does not have a value.
4026
4027 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4028 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4029 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4030 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4031 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4032 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4033 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4034 linker script variable might be referred to as:
4035
4036 @smallexample
4037 extern int foo;
4038 @end smallexample
4039
4040 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4041
4042 @smallexample
4043 _foo = 1000;
4044 @end smallexample
4045
4046 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4047 transformation has taken place.
4048
4049 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4050 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4051 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4052 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4053 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4054 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4055 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4056
4057 @smallexample
4058 int foo = 1000;
4059 @end smallexample
4060
4061 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4062 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4063 number 1000 is initially stored.
4064
4065 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4066 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4067 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4068 So:
4069
4070 @smallexample
4071 foo = 1;
4072 @end smallexample
4073
4074 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4075 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4076 address. Whereas:
4077
4078 @smallexample
4079 int * a = & foo;
4080 @end smallexample
4081
4082 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4083 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4084 the variable @samp{a}.
4085
4086 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4087 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4088 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4089
4090 @smallexample
4091 foo = 1000;
4092 @end smallexample
4093
4094 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4095 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4096 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4097 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4098 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4099
4100 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4101 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4102 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4103 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4104 linker script contains these declarations:
4105
4106 @smallexample
4107 @group
4108 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4109 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4110 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4111 @end group
4112 @end smallexample
4113
4114 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4115
4116 @smallexample
4117 @group
4118 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4119
4120 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4121 @end group
4122 @end smallexample
4123
4124 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4125 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4126 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4127
4128 @smallexample
4129 @group
4130 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4131
4132 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4133 @end group
4134 @end smallexample
4135
4136 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4137 operators.
4138
4139 @node SECTIONS
4140 @section SECTIONS Command
4141 @kindex SECTIONS
4142 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4143 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4144
4145 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4146 @smallexample
4147 SECTIONS
4148 @{
4149 @var{sections-command}
4150 @var{sections-command}
4151 @dots{}
4152 @}
4153 @end smallexample
4154
4155 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4156
4157 @itemize @bullet
4158 @item
4159 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4160 @item
4161 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4162 @item
4163 an output section description
4164 @item
4165 an overlay description
4166 @end itemize
4167
4168 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4169 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4170 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4171 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4172 the layout of the output file.
4173
4174 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4175 below.
4176
4177 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4178 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4179 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4180 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4181 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4182 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4183
4184 @menu
4185 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4186 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4187 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4188 * Input Section:: Input section description
4189 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4190 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4191 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4192 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4193 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4194 @end menu
4195
4196 @node Output Section Description
4197 @subsection Output Section Description
4198 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4199 @smallexample
4200 @group
4201 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4202 [AT(@var{lma})]
4203 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4204 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4205 [@var{constraint}]
4206 @{
4207 @var{output-section-command}
4208 @var{output-section-command}
4209 @dots{}
4210 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4211 @end group
4212 @end smallexample
4213
4214 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4215
4216 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4217 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4218 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4219 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4220 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4221
4222 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4223
4224 @itemize @bullet
4225 @item
4226 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4227 @item
4228 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4229 @item
4230 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4231 @item
4232 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4233 @end itemize
4234
4235 @node Output Section Name
4236 @subsection Output Section Name
4237 @cindex name, section
4238 @cindex section name
4239 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4240 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4241 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4242 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4243 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4244 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4245 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4246 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4247 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4248 commas must be quoted.
4249
4250 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4251 Discarding}.
4252
4253 @node Output Section Address
4254 @subsection Output Section Address
4255 @cindex address, section
4256 @cindex section address
4257 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4258 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4259 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4260
4261 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4262 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4263 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4264 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4265 contained within the output section.
4266
4267 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4268
4269 @itemize @bullet
4270 @item
4271 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4272 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4273 in that region.
4274
4275 @item
4276 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4277 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4278 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4279 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4280
4281 @item
4282 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4283 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4284 counter.
4285 @end itemize
4286
4287 @noindent
4288 For example:
4289
4290 @smallexample
4291 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4292 @end smallexample
4293
4294 @noindent
4295 and
4296
4297 @smallexample
4298 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4299 @end smallexample
4300
4301 @noindent
4302 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4303 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4304 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4305 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4306 input sections.
4307
4308 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4309 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4310 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4311 do something like this:
4312 @smallexample
4313 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4314 @end smallexample
4315 @noindent
4316 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4317 aligned upward to the specified value.
4318
4319 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4320 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4321 sections are ignored).
4322
4323 @node Input Section
4324 @subsection Input Section Description
4325 @cindex input sections
4326 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4327 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4328
4329 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4330 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4331 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4332 map the input files into your memory layout.
4333
4334 @menu
4335 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4336 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4337 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4338 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4339 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4340 @end menu
4341
4342 @node Input Section Basics
4343 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4344 @cindex input section basics
4345 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4346 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4347
4348 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4349 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4350
4351 The most common input section description is to include all input
4352 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4353 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4354 @smallexample
4355 *(.text)
4356 @end smallexample
4357 @noindent
4358 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4359 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4360 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4361 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4362 example:
4363 @smallexample
4364 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4365 @end smallexample
4366 @noindent
4367 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4368 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4369 placed inside the section list, for example:
4370 @smallexample
4371 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4372 @end smallexample
4373 @noindent
4374 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4375 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4376 more than one section, as described below.
4377
4378 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4379 @smallexample
4380 *(.text .rdata)
4381 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4382 @end smallexample
4383 @noindent
4384 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4385 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4386 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4387 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4388 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4389 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4390
4391 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4392 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4393 immediately following section, for example:
4394 @smallexample
4395 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4396 @end smallexample
4397 @noindent
4398 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4399 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4400 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4401 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4402 could be modified to:
4403 @smallexample
4404 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4405 @end smallexample
4406 @noindent
4407 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4408 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4409 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4410 @smallexample
4411 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4412 @end smallexample
4413
4414 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4415 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4416 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4417 @smallexample
4418 data.o(.data)
4419 @end smallexample
4420
4421 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4422 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4423
4424 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4425
4426 @smallexample
4427 @group
4428 SECTIONS @{
4429 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4430 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4431 @}
4432 @end group
4433 @end smallexample
4434
4435 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4436 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4437 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4438 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4439 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4440
4441 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4442 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4443 with no whitespace around the colon.
4444
4445 @table @samp
4446 @item archive:file
4447 matches file within archive
4448 @item archive:
4449 matches the whole archive
4450 @item :file
4451 matches file but not one in an archive
4452 @end table
4453
4454 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4455 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4456 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4457 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4458 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4459 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4460 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4461 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4462 command.
4463
4464 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4465 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4466 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4467 @smallexample
4468 data.o
4469 @end smallexample
4470
4471 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4472 and does not contain any wild card
4473 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4474 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4475 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4476 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4477 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4478 the archive search path.
4479
4480 @node Input Section Wildcards
4481 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4482 @cindex input section wildcards
4483 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4484 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4485 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4486 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4487 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4488
4489 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4490 pattern for the file name.
4491
4492 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4493
4494 @table @samp
4495 @item *
4496 matches any number of characters
4497 @item ?
4498 matches any single character
4499 @item [@var{chars}]
4500 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4501 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4502 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4503 @item \
4504 quotes the following character
4505 @end table
4506
4507 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4508 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4509 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4510 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4511 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4512 a @samp{/} character.
4513
4514 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4515 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4516 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4517
4518 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4519 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4520 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4521 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4522 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4523 @smallexample
4524 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4525 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4526 @end smallexample
4527
4528 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4529 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4530 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4531 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4532 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4533 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4534 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4535
4536 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4537 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4538 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4539 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4540 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4541 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4542
4543 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4544 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4545 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4546 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4547 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4548
4549 @cindex SORT
4550 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4551
4552 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4553 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4554
4555 @enumerate
4556 @item
4557 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4558 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4559 sections have the same name.
4560 @item
4561 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4562 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4563 sections have the same alignment.
4564 @item
4565 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4566 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4567 @item
4568 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4569 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4570 @item
4571 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4572 @end enumerate
4573
4574 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4575 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4576 takes precedence over the command line option.
4577
4578 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4579 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4580 treated as nested sorting command.
4581
4582 @enumerate
4583 @item
4584 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4585 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4586 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4587 @item
4588 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4589 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4590 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4591 @end enumerate
4592
4593 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4594 command line option will be ignored.
4595
4596 @cindex SORT_NONE
4597 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4598 section sorting option.
4599
4600 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4601 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4602 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4603
4604 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4605 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4606 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4607 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4608 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4609 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4610 @smallexample
4611 @group
4612 SECTIONS @{
4613 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4614 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4615 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4616 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4617 @}
4618 @end group
4619 @end smallexample
4620
4621 @node Input Section Common
4622 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4623 @cindex common symbol placement
4624 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4625 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4626 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4627 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4628 named @samp{COMMON}.
4629
4630 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4631 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4632 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4633 input files are placed in another section.
4634
4635 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4636 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4637 @smallexample
4638 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4639 @end smallexample
4640
4641 @cindex scommon section
4642 @cindex small common symbols
4643 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4644 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4645 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4646 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4647 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4648 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4649 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4650 locations.
4651
4652 @cindex [COMMON]
4653 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4654 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4655 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4656
4657 @node Input Section Keep
4658 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4659 @cindex KEEP
4660 @cindex garbage collection
4661 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4662 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4663 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4664 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4665 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4666
4667 @node Input Section Example
4668 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4669 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4670 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4671 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4672 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4673 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4674 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4675 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4676 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4677 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4678
4679 @smallexample
4680 @group
4681 SECTIONS @{
4682 outputa 0x10000 :
4683 @{
4684 all.o
4685 foo.o (.input1)
4686 @}
4687 @end group
4688 @group
4689 outputb :
4690 @{
4691 foo.o (.input2)
4692 foo1.o (.input1)
4693 @}
4694 @end group
4695 @group
4696 outputc :
4697 @{
4698 *(.input1)
4699 *(.input2)
4700 @}
4701 @}
4702 @end group
4703 @end smallexample
4704
4705 If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4706 and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4707 automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4708 __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4709 indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4710 respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4711 C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4712
4713 @node Output Section Data
4714 @subsection Output Section Data
4715 @cindex data
4716 @cindex section data
4717 @cindex output section data
4718 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4719 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4720 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4721 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4722 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4723 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4724 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4725 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4726 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4727 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4728 counter.
4729
4730 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4731 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4732 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4733 stored.
4734
4735 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4736 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4737 @smallexample
4738 BYTE(1)
4739 LONG(addr)
4740 @end smallexample
4741
4742 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4743 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4744 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4745 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4746 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4747
4748 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4749 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4750 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4751 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4752 endianness of the first input object file.
4753
4754 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4755 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4756 @smallexample
4757 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4758 @end smallexample
4759 whereas this will work:
4760 @smallexample
4761 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4762 @end smallexample
4763
4764 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4765 @cindex holes, filling
4766 @cindex unspecified memory
4767 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4768 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4769 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4770 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4771 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4772 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4773 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4774 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4775 different parts of an output section.
4776
4777 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4778 value @samp{0x90}:
4779 @smallexample
4780 FILL(0x90909090)
4781 @end smallexample
4782
4783 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4784 section attribute, but it only affects the
4785 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4786 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4787 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4788 expression.
4789
4790 @node Output Section Keywords
4791 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4792 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4793 commands.
4794
4795 @table @code
4796 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4797 @cindex input filename symbols
4798 @cindex filename symbols
4799 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4800 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4801 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4802 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4803 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4804
4805 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4806 normally used for any other object file format.
4807
4808 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4809 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4810 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4811 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4812 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4813 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4814 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4815 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4816 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4817 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4818 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4819 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4820 ignored for other object file formats.
4821
4822 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4823 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4824 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4825 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4826 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4827 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4828 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4829 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4830 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4831 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4832 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4833 @code{exit}.
4834
4835 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4836 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4837 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4838 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4839 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4840 runtime code expects to see.
4841
4842 @smallexample
4843 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4844 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4845 *(.ctors)
4846 LONG(0)
4847 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4848 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4849 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4850 *(.dtors)
4851 LONG(0)
4852 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4853 @end smallexample
4854
4855 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4856 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4857 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4858 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4859 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4860 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4861 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4862 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4863
4864 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4865 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4866 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4867 scripts.
4868
4869 @end table
4870
4871 @node Output Section Discarding
4872 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4873 @cindex discarding sections
4874 @cindex sections, discarding
4875 @cindex removing sections
4876 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4877 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4878 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4879 @smallexample
4880 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4881 @end smallexample
4882 @noindent
4883 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4884 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4885 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4886 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4887 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4888 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4889 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4890 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4891 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4892
4893 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4894 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4895 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4896 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4897 section is discarded.
4898
4899 @cindex /DISCARD/
4900 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4901 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4902 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4903
4904 @node Output Section Attributes
4905 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4906 @cindex output section attributes
4907 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4908 like this:
4909
4910 @smallexample
4911 @group
4912 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4913 [AT(@var{lma})]
4914 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4915 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4916 [@var{constraint}]
4917 @{
4918 @var{output-section-command}
4919 @var{output-section-command}
4920 @dots{}
4921 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4922 @end group
4923 @end smallexample
4924
4925 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4926 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4927 remaining section attributes.
4928
4929 @menu
4930 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4931 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4932 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4933 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4934 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4935 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4936 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4937 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4938 @end menu
4939
4940 @node Output Section Type
4941 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4942 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4943 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4944
4945 @table @code
4946 @item NOLOAD
4947 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4948 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4949 @item DSECT
4950 @itemx COPY
4951 @itemx INFO
4952 @itemx OVERLAY
4953 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4954 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4955 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4956 section when the program is run.
4957 @end table
4958
4959 @kindex NOLOAD
4960 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4961 @cindex loading, preventing
4962 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4963 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4964 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4965 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4966 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4967 @smallexample
4968 @group
4969 SECTIONS @{
4970 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4971 @dots{}
4972 @}
4973 @end group
4974 @end smallexample
4975
4976 @node Output Section LMA
4977 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4978 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4979 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4980 @cindex load address
4981 @cindex section load address
4982 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4983 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4984 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4985 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4986 address is optional.
4987
4988 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4989 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4990 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4991 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4992 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4993
4994 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4995 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4996 load address:
4997
4998 @itemize @bullet
4999 @item
5000 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5001 the LMA address as well.
5002
5003 @item
5004 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5005
5006 @item
5007 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5008 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5009 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5010 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5011 the last section in the located region.
5012
5013 @item
5014 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5015 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5016
5017 @item
5018 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5019 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5020 @end itemize
5021
5022 @cindex ROM initialized data
5023 @cindex initialized data in ROM
5024 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5025 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5026 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5027 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5028 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5029 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5030 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5031 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5032
5033 @smallexample
5034 @group
5035 SECTIONS
5036 @{
5037 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
5038 .mdata 0x2000 :
5039 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5040 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5041 .bss 0x3000 :
5042 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5043 @}
5044 @end group
5045 @end smallexample
5046
5047 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5048 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5049 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5050 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5051 script.
5052
5053 @smallexample
5054 @group
5055 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5056 char *src = &_etext;
5057 char *dst = &_data;
5058
5059 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5060 while (dst < &_edata)
5061 *dst++ = *src++;
5062
5063 /* Zero bss. */
5064 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5065 *dst = 0;
5066 @end group
5067 @end smallexample
5068
5069 @node Forced Output Alignment
5070 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5071 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5072 @cindex forcing output section alignment
5073 @cindex output section alignment
5074 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5075 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5076 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5077
5078 @node Forced Input Alignment
5079 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5080 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5081 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5082 @cindex input section alignment
5083 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5084 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5085 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5086
5087 @node Output Section Constraint
5088 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5089 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5090 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5091 @cindex constraints on output sections
5092 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5093 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5094 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5095 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5096
5097 @node Output Section Region
5098 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5099 @kindex >@var{region}
5100 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5101 @cindex memory regions and sections
5102 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5103 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5104
5105 Here is a simple example:
5106 @smallexample
5107 @group
5108 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5109 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5110 @end group
5111 @end smallexample
5112
5113 @node Output Section Phdr
5114 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5115 @kindex :@var{phdr}
5116 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5117 @cindex program headers and sections
5118 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5119 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5120 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5121 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5122 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5123 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5124
5125 Here is a simple example:
5126 @smallexample
5127 @group
5128 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5129 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5130 @end group
5131 @end smallexample
5132
5133 @node Output Section Fill
5134 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5135 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5136 @cindex section fill pattern
5137 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5138 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5139 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5140 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5141 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5142 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5143 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5144 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5145 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5146 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5147 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5148 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5149 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5150
5151 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5152 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5153
5154 Here is a simple example:
5155 @smallexample
5156 @group
5157 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5158 @end group
5159 @end smallexample
5160
5161 @node Overlay Description
5162 @subsection Overlay Description
5163 @kindex OVERLAY
5164 @cindex overlays
5165 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5166 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5167 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5168 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5169 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5170 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5171 than another.
5172
5173 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5174 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5175 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5176 command is as follows:
5177 @smallexample
5178 @group
5179 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5180 @{
5181 @var{secname1}
5182 @{
5183 @var{output-section-command}
5184 @var{output-section-command}
5185 @dots{}
5186 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5187 @var{secname2}
5188 @{
5189 @var{output-section-command}
5190 @var{output-section-command}
5191 @dots{}
5192 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5193 @dots{}
5194 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5195 @end group
5196 @end smallexample
5197
5198 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5199 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5200 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5201 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5202 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5203 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5204
5205 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5206 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5207
5208 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5209 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5210 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5211 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5212 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5213 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5214
5215 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5216 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5217 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5218 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5219 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5220
5221 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5222 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5223 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5224 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5225 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5226 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5227 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5228
5229 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5230 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5231
5232 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5233 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5234 @smallexample
5235 @group
5236 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5237 @{
5238 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5239 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5240 @}
5241 @end group
5242 @end smallexample
5243 @noindent
5244 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5245 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5246 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5247 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5248 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5249 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5250
5251 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5252 like the following.
5253
5254 @smallexample
5255 @group
5256 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5257 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5258 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5259 @end group
5260 @end smallexample
5261
5262 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5263 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5264 example could have been written identically as follows.
5265
5266 @smallexample
5267 @group
5268 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5269 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5270 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5271 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5272 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5273 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5274 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5275 @end group
5276 @end smallexample
5277
5278 @node MEMORY
5279 @section MEMORY Command
5280 @kindex MEMORY
5281 @cindex memory regions
5282 @cindex regions of memory
5283 @cindex allocating memory
5284 @cindex discontinuous memory
5285 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5286 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5287
5288 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5289 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5290 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5291 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5292 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5293 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5294 around to fit into the available regions.
5295
5296 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5297 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5298 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5299 @code{MEMORY} is:
5300 @smallexample
5301 @group
5302 MEMORY
5303 @{
5304 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5305 @dots{}
5306 @}
5307 @end group
5308 @end smallexample
5309
5310 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5311 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5312 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5313 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5314 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5315 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5316 command.
5317
5318 @cindex memory region attributes
5319 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5320 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5321 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5322 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5323 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5324 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5325 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5326
5327 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5328 @table @samp
5329 @item R
5330 Read-only section
5331 @item W
5332 Read/write section
5333 @item X
5334 Executable section
5335 @item A
5336 Allocatable section
5337 @item I
5338 Initialized section
5339 @item L
5340 Same as @samp{I}
5341 @item !
5342 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5343 @end table
5344
5345 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5346 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5347 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5348 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5349 attributes.
5350
5351 @kindex ORIGIN =
5352 @kindex o =
5353 @kindex org =
5354 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5355 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5356 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5357 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5358 @code{ORG}).
5359
5360 @kindex LENGTH =
5361 @kindex len =
5362 @kindex l =
5363 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5364 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5365 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5366 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5367
5368 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5369 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5370 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5371 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5372 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5373 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5374 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5375 region.
5376
5377 @smallexample
5378 @group
5379 MEMORY
5380 @{
5381 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5382 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5383 @}
5384 @end group
5385 @end smallexample
5386
5387 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5388 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5389 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5390 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5391 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5392 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5393 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5394 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5395 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5396
5397 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5398 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5399 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5400
5401 @smallexample
5402 @group
5403 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5404 @end group
5405 @end smallexample
5406
5407 @node PHDRS
5408 @section PHDRS Command
5409 @kindex PHDRS
5410 @cindex program headers
5411 @cindex ELF program headers
5412 @cindex program segments
5413 @cindex segments, ELF
5414 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5415 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5416 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5417 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5418
5419 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5420 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5421 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5422 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5423 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5424
5425 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5426 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5427 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5428 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5429 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5430
5431 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5432 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5433 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5434
5435 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5436 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5437
5438 @smallexample
5439 @group
5440 PHDRS
5441 @{
5442 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5443 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5444 @}
5445 @end group
5446 @end smallexample
5447
5448 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5449 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5450 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5451 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5452 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5453 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5454
5455 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5456 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5457 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5458 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5459 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5460 Section Phdr}.
5461
5462 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5463 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5464 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5465 contain the section.
5466
5467 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5468 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5469 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5470 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5471 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5472 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5473 segment at all.
5474
5475 @kindex FILEHDR
5476 @kindex PHDRS
5477 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5478 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5479 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5480 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5481 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5482 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5483 these keywords.
5484
5485 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5486 value of the keyword.
5487
5488 @table @asis
5489 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5490 Indicates an unused program header.
5491
5492 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5493 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5494 the file.
5495
5496 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5497 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5498
5499 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5500 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5501 found.
5502
5503 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5504 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5505
5506 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5507 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5508 ABI.
5509
5510 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5511 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5512
5513 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5514 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5515
5516 @item @var{expression}
5517 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5518 be used for types not defined above.
5519 @end table
5520
5521 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5522 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5523 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5524 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5525 output section attribute.
5526
5527 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5528 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5529 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5530 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5531 header.
5532
5533 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5534 headers used on a native ELF system.
5535
5536 @example
5537 @group
5538 PHDRS
5539 @{
5540 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5541 interp PT_INTERP ;
5542 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5543 data PT_LOAD ;
5544 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5545 @}
5546
5547 SECTIONS
5548 @{
5549 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5550 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5551 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5552 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5553 @dots{}
5554 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5555 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5556 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5557 @dots{}
5558 @}
5559 @end group
5560 @end example
5561
5562 @node VERSION
5563 @section VERSION Command
5564 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5565 @cindex symbol versions
5566 @cindex version script
5567 @cindex versions of symbols
5568 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5569 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5570 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5571 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5572 shared library.
5573
5574 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5575 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5576 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5577
5578 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5579 @smallexample
5580 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5581 @end smallexample
5582
5583 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5584 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5585 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5586 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5587 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5588 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5589 library.
5590
5591 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5592 examples.
5593
5594 @smallexample
5595 VERS_1.1 @{
5596 global:
5597 foo1;
5598 local:
5599 old*;
5600 original*;
5601 new*;
5602 @};
5603
5604 VERS_1.2 @{
5605 foo2;
5606 @} VERS_1.1;
5607
5608 VERS_2.0 @{
5609 bar1; bar2;
5610 extern "C++" @{
5611 ns::*;
5612 "f(int, double)";
5613 @};
5614 @} VERS_1.2;
5615 @end smallexample
5616
5617 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5618 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5619 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5620 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5621 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5622 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5623 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5624 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5625 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5626 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5627
5628 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5629 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5630 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5631
5632 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5633 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5634 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5635
5636 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5637 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5638 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5639 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5640 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5641 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5642 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5643 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5644 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5645
5646 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5647 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5648 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5649 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5650
5651 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5652 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5653 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5654 won't.
5655
5656 @smallexample
5657 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5658 @end smallexample
5659
5660 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5661 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5662 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5663 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5664 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5665 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5666 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5667 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5668 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5669 search for each symbol reference.
5670
5671 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5672 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5673 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5674 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5675 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5676 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5677 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5678 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5679 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5680
5681 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5682 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5683 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5684 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5685 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5686 @smallexample
5687 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5688 @end smallexample
5689 @noindent
5690 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5691 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5692 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5693 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5694 takes precedence over a version script.
5695
5696 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5697 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5698 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5699 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5700 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5701
5702 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5703 source file. Here is an example:
5704
5705 @smallexample
5706 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5707 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5708 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5709 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5710 @end smallexample
5711
5712 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5713 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5714 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5715 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5716
5717 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5718 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5719 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5720 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5721 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5722 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5723
5724 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5725 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5726 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5727 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5728
5729 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5730
5731 @smallexample
5732 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5733 @end smallexample
5734
5735 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5736 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5737 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5738 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5739 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5740
5741 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5742 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5743 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5744 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5745 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5746 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5747 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5748 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5749 expect when you upgrade.
5750
5751 @node Expressions
5752 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5753 @cindex expressions
5754 @cindex arithmetic
5755 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5756 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5757 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5758 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5759
5760 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5761
5762 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5763 expressions.
5764
5765 @menu
5766 * Constants:: Constants
5767 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5768 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5769 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5770 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5771 * Operators:: Operators
5772 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5773 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5774 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5775 @end menu
5776
5777 @node Constants
5778 @subsection Constants
5779 @cindex integer notation
5780 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5781 All constants are integers.
5782
5783 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5784 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5785 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5786 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5787 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5788 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5789
5790 @cindex scaled integers
5791 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5792 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5793 @cindex suffixes for integers
5794 @cindex integer suffixes
5795 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5796 constant by
5797 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5798 @ifnottex
5799 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5800 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5801 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5802 @end ifnottex
5803 @tex
5804 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5805 @end tex
5806 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5807 respectively. For example, the following
5808 all refer to the same quantity:
5809
5810 @smallexample
5811 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5812 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5813 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5814 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5815 @end smallexample
5816
5817 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5818 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5819
5820 @node Symbolic Constants
5821 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5822 @cindex symbolic constants
5823 @kindex CONSTANT
5824 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5825 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5826
5827 @table @code
5828 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5829 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5830 The target's maximum page size.
5831
5832 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5833 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5834 The target's default page size.
5835 @end table
5836
5837 So for example:
5838
5839 @smallexample
5840 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5841 @end smallexample
5842
5843 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5844 supported by the target.
5845
5846 @node Symbols
5847 @subsection Symbol Names
5848 @cindex symbol names
5849 @cindex names
5850 @cindex quoted symbol names
5851 @kindex "
5852 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5853 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5854 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5855 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5856 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5857 @smallexample
5858 "SECTION" = 9;
5859 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5860 @end smallexample
5861
5862 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5863 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5864 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5865
5866 @node Orphan Sections
5867 @subsection Orphan Sections
5868 @cindex orphan
5869 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5870 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5871 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5872 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5873 in which to place the orphaned input section.
5874
5875 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5876 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5877 placed at the end of that output section.
5878
5879 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5880 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5881 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5882 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5883 one new output section.
5884
5885 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5886 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
5887 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5888 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5889 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5890 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5891 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
5892
5893 The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5894 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5895 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5896
5897 @node Location Counter
5898 @subsection The Location Counter
5899 @kindex .
5900 @cindex dot
5901 @cindex location counter
5902 @cindex current output location
5903 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5904 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5905 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5906 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5907 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5908
5909 @cindex holes
5910 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5911 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5912 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5913 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5914 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5915
5916 @smallexample
5917 SECTIONS
5918 @{
5919 output :
5920 @{
5921 file1(.text)
5922 . = . + 1000;
5923 file2(.text)
5924 . += 1000;
5925 file3(.text)
5926 @} = 0x12345678;
5927 @}
5928 @end smallexample
5929 @noindent
5930 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5931 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5932 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5933 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5934 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5935 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5936
5937 @cindex dot inside sections
5938 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5939 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5940 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5941 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5942 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5943 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5944
5945 @smallexample
5946 SECTIONS
5947 @{
5948 . = 0x100
5949 .text: @{
5950 *(.text)
5951 . = 0x200
5952 @}
5953 . = 0x500
5954 .data: @{
5955 *(.data)
5956 . += 0x600
5957 @}
5958 @}
5959 @end smallexample
5960
5961 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5962 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5963 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5964 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5965 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5966 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5967 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5968 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5969
5970 @cindex dot outside sections
5971 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5972 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5973 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5974
5975 @smallexample
5976 SECTIONS
5977 @{
5978 start_of_text = . ;
5979 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5980 end_of_text = . ;
5981
5982 start_of_data = . ;
5983 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5984 end_of_data = . ;
5985 @}
5986 @end smallexample
5987
5988 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5989 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5990 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5991 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5992 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5993 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5994 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5995 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5996 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5997 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5998 as follows:
5999
6000 @smallexample
6001 SECTIONS
6002 @{
6003 start_of_text = . ;
6004 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6005 end_of_text = . ;
6006
6007 start_of_data = . ;
6008 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6009 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6010 end_of_data = . ;
6011 @}
6012 @end smallexample
6013
6014 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6015 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6016 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6017 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6018 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6019 section. So you could write:
6020
6021 @smallexample
6022 SECTIONS
6023 @{
6024 start_of_text = . ;
6025 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6026 end_of_text = . ;
6027
6028 . = . ;
6029 start_of_data = . ;
6030 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6031 end_of_data = . ;
6032 @}
6033 @end smallexample
6034
6035 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6036 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6037
6038 @need 2000
6039 @node Operators
6040 @subsection Operators
6041 @cindex operators for arithmetic
6042 @cindex arithmetic operators
6043 @cindex precedence in expressions
6044 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6045 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6046 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6047 @ifnottex
6048 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6049 @smallexample
6050 precedence associativity Operators Notes
6051 (highest)
6052 1 left ! - ~ (1)
6053 2 left * / %
6054 3 left + -
6055 4 left >> <<
6056 5 left == != > < <= >=
6057 6 left &
6058 7 left |
6059 8 left &&
6060 9 left ||
6061 10 right ? :
6062 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6063 (lowest)
6064 @end smallexample
6065 Notes:
6066 (1) Prefix operators
6067 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6068 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6069 @end ifnottex
6070 @tex
6071 \vskip \baselineskip
6072 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6073 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6074 \hrule
6075 \halign
6076 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6077 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6078 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6079 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6080 \noalign{\hrule}
6081 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6082 &highest&&&&&\cr
6083 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6084 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6085 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6086 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6087 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6088 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6089 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
6090 &7&&left&&|&\cr
6091 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6092 &9&&left&&||&\cr
6093 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
6094 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6095 &lowest&&&&&\cr
6096 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6097 \hrule}
6098 @end tex
6099 @iftex
6100 {
6101 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6102 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6103 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6104 }
6105 @end iftex
6106 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6107
6108 @node Evaluation
6109 @subsection Evaluation
6110 @cindex lazy evaluation
6111 @cindex expression evaluation order
6112 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6113 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6114
6115 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6116 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6117 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6118 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6119
6120 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6121 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6122 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6123 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6124
6125 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6126 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6127 allocation.
6128
6129 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6130 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6131
6132 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6133 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6134 following
6135 @smallexample
6136 @group
6137 SECTIONS
6138 @{
6139 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6140 @{ *(.text) @}
6141 @}
6142 @end group
6143 @end smallexample
6144 @noindent
6145 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6146 address}.
6147
6148 @node Expression Section
6149 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6150 @cindex expression sections
6151 @cindex absolute expressions
6152 @cindex relative expressions
6153 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6154 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6155 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6156 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6157 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6158 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6159 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6160 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6161 operations.
6162
6163 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6164 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6165 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6166 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6167 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6168 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6169 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6170 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6171 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6172 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6173 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6174 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6175 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6176 everywhere.
6177
6178 In the following simple example,
6179
6180 @smallexample
6181 @group
6182 SECTIONS
6183 @{
6184 . = 0x100;
6185 __executable_start = 0x100;
6186 .data :
6187 @{
6188 . = 0x10;
6189 __data_start = 0x10;
6190 *(.data)
6191 @}
6192 @dots{}
6193 @}
6194 @end group
6195 @end smallexample
6196
6197 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6198 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6199 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6200 section in the second two assignments.
6201
6202 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6203 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6204
6205 @itemize @bullet
6206 @item
6207 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6208 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6209 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6210 @item
6211 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6212 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6213 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6214 @item
6215 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6216 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6217 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6218 before applying the operator.
6219 @end itemize
6220
6221 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6222
6223 @itemize @bullet
6224 @item
6225 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6226 @item
6227 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6228 @item
6229 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6230 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6231 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6232 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6233 but an absolute address otherwise.
6234 @item
6235 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6236 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6237 section as the relative operand(s).
6238 @item
6239 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6240 conversions) is an absolute address.
6241 @end itemize
6242
6243 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6244 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6245 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6246 section @samp{.data}:
6247 @smallexample
6248 SECTIONS
6249 @{
6250 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6251 @}
6252 @end smallexample
6253 @noindent
6254 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6255 @samp{.data} section.
6256
6257 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6258 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6259
6260 @node Builtin Functions
6261 @subsection Builtin Functions
6262 @cindex functions in expressions
6263 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6264 use in linker script expressions.
6265
6266 @table @code
6267 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6268 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6269 @cindex expression, absolute
6270 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6271 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6272 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6273 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6274
6275 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6276 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6277 @cindex section address in expression
6278 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6279 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6280 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6281 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6282 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6283 the other two will be absolute:
6284 @smallexample
6285 @group
6286 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6287 .output1 :
6288 @{
6289 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6290 @dots{}
6291 @}
6292 .output :
6293 @{
6294 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6295 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6296 @}
6297 @dots{} @}
6298 @end group
6299 @end smallexample
6300
6301 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6302 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6303 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6304 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6305 @cindex round up location counter
6306 @cindex align location counter
6307 @cindex round up expression
6308 @cindex align expression
6309 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6310 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6311 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6312 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6313 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6314 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6315
6316 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6317 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6318 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6319 input sections:
6320 @smallexample
6321 @group
6322 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6323 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6324 *(.data)
6325 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6326 @}
6327 @dots{} @}
6328 @end group
6329 @end smallexample
6330 @noindent
6331 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6332 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6333 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6334 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6335
6336 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6337
6338 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6339 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6340 @cindex section alignment
6341 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6342 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6343 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6344 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6345 value in that section.
6346 @smallexample
6347 @group
6348 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6349 .output @{
6350 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6351 @dots{}
6352 @}
6353 @dots{} @}
6354 @end group
6355 @end smallexample
6356
6357 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6358 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6359 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6360 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6361 section.
6362
6363 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6364 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6365 This is equivalent to either
6366 @smallexample
6367 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6368 @end smallexample
6369 or
6370 @smallexample
6371 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6372 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6373 @end smallexample
6374 @noindent
6375 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6376 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6377 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6378 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6379 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6380 bytes in the on-disk file.
6381
6382 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6383 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6384 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6385 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6386 running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6387 that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6388 page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
6389
6390 @noindent
6391 Example:
6392 @smallexample
6393 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6394 @end smallexample
6395
6396 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6397 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6398 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6399 evaluation purposes.
6400
6401 @smallexample
6402 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6403 @end smallexample
6404
6405 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6406 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6407 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6408 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6409 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6410 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6411 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6412 argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6413 script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6414 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6415 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6416 section alignment.
6417
6418 @smallexample
6419 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6420 @end smallexample
6421
6422 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6423 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6424 @cindex symbol defaults
6425 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6426 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6427 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6428 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6429 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6430 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6431 existed, its value is preserved:
6432
6433 @smallexample
6434 @group
6435 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6436 .text : @{
6437 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6438 @dots{}
6439 @}
6440 @dots{}
6441 @}
6442 @end group
6443 @end smallexample
6444
6445 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6446 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6447 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6448
6449 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6450 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6451 @cindex section load address in expression
6452 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6453 Section LMA}).
6454
6455 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6456 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6457 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6458 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6459
6460 @kindex MAX
6461 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6462 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6463
6464 @kindex MIN
6465 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6466 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6467
6468 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6469 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6470 @cindex unallocated address, next
6471 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6472 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6473 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6474 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6475
6476 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6477 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6478 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6479
6480 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6481 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6482 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6483 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6484 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6485 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6486 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6487 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6488 name.
6489
6490 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6491 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6492 @cindex section size
6493 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6494 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6495 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6496 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6497 @smallexample
6498 @group
6499 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6500 .output @{
6501 .start = . ;
6502 @dots{}
6503 .end = . ;
6504 @}
6505 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6506 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6507 @dots{} @}
6508 @end group
6509 @end smallexample
6510
6511 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6512 @itemx sizeof_headers
6513 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6514 @cindex header size
6515 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6516 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6517 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6518 choose, to facilitate paging.
6519
6520 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6521 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6522 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6523 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6524 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6525 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6526 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6527 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6528 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6529 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6530 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6531 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6532 @end table
6533
6534 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6535 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6536 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6537 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6538 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6539 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6540 linker will report an error.
6541
6542 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6543
6544 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6545 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6546 commands.
6547
6548 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6549 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6550 read. This can affect archive searching.
6551
6552 @ifset GENERIC
6553 @node Machine Dependent
6554 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6555
6556 @cindex machine dependencies
6557 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6558 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6559 functionality are not listed.
6560
6561 @menu
6562 @ifset H8300
6563 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6564 @end ifset
6565 @ifset I960
6566 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6567 @end ifset
6568 @ifset M68HC11
6569 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6570 @end ifset
6571 @ifset ARM
6572 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6573 @end ifset
6574 @ifset HPPA
6575 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6576 @end ifset
6577 @ifset M68K
6578 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6579 @end ifset
6580 @ifset MIPS
6581 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6582 @end ifset
6583 @ifset MMIX
6584 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6585 @end ifset
6586 @ifset MSP430
6587 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6588 @end ifset
6589 @ifset NDS32
6590 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6591 @end ifset
6592 @ifset NIOSII
6593 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6594 @end ifset
6595 @ifset POWERPC
6596 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6597 @end ifset
6598 @ifset POWERPC64
6599 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6600 @end ifset
6601 @ifset S/390
6602 * S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6603 @end ifset
6604 @ifset SPU
6605 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6606 @end ifset
6607 @ifset TICOFF
6608 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6609 @end ifset
6610 @ifset WIN32
6611 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6612 @end ifset
6613 @ifset XTENSA
6614 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6615 @end ifset
6616 @end menu
6617 @end ifset
6618
6619 @ifset H8300
6620 @ifclear GENERIC
6621 @raisesections
6622 @end ifclear
6623
6624 @node H8/300
6625 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6626
6627 @cindex H8/300 support
6628 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6629 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6630
6631 @table @emph
6632 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6633 @item relaxing address modes
6634 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6635 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6636 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6637 respectively.
6638
6639 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6640 @item synthesizing instructions
6641 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6642 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6643 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6644 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6645 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6646 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6647 top page of memory).
6648
6649 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6650 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6651 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6652 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6653 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6654 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6655 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6656
6657 @item bit manipulation instructions
6658 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6659 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6660 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6661 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6662 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6663 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6664 the top page of memory).
6665
6666 @item system control instructions
6667 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6668 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6669 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6670 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6671 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6672 the top page of memory).
6673 @end table
6674
6675 @ifclear GENERIC
6676 @lowersections
6677 @end ifclear
6678 @end ifset
6679
6680 @ifclear GENERIC
6681 @ifset Renesas
6682 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6683 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6684 @node Renesas
6685 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6686
6687 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6688 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6689 options are required for these chips.
6690 @end ifset
6691 @end ifclear
6692
6693 @ifset I960
6694 @ifclear GENERIC
6695 @raisesections
6696 @end ifclear
6697
6698 @node i960
6699 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6700
6701 @cindex i960 support
6702
6703 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6704 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6705 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6706 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6707 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6708 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6709 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6710
6711 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6712 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6713 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6714 the names
6715
6716 @smallexample
6717 @group
6718 try
6719 libtry.a
6720 tryca
6721 libtryca.a
6722 @end group
6723 @end smallexample
6724
6725 @noindent
6726 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6727 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6728
6729 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6730 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6731 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6732 specifies a library.
6733
6734 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6735 @cindex relaxing on i960
6736 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6737 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6738 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6739 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6740 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6741 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6742 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6743 not itself call any subroutines).
6744
6745 @ifclear GENERIC
6746 @lowersections
6747 @end ifclear
6748 @end ifset
6749
6750 @ifset ARM
6751 @ifclear GENERIC
6752 @raisesections
6753 @end ifclear
6754
6755 @ifset M68HC11
6756 @ifclear GENERIC
6757 @raisesections
6758 @end ifclear
6759
6760 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6761 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6762
6763 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6764
6765 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6766
6767 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6768 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6769
6770 @table @emph
6771 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6772 @item relaxing address modes
6773 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6774 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6775 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6776 respectively.
6777
6778 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6779 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6780 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6781
6782 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6783 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6784 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6785 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6786 @code{bset} instructions.
6787
6788 @end table
6789
6790 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6791
6792 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6793 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6794 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6795 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6796 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6797 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6798 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6799 point to the function trampoline.
6800
6801 @ifclear GENERIC
6802 @lowersections
6803 @end ifclear
6804 @end ifset
6805
6806 @node ARM
6807 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6808
6809 @cindex ARM interworking support
6810 @kindex --support-old-code
6811 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6812 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6813 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6814 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6815 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6816 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6817 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6818 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6819 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6820 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6821
6822 @cindex thumb entry point
6823 @cindex entry point, thumb
6824 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6825 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6826 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6827 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6828 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6829 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6830
6831 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6832 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6833 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6834 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6835 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6836 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6837
6838 @cindex BE8
6839 @kindex --be8
6840 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6841 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6842 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6843 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6844 little-endian code.
6845
6846 @cindex TARGET1
6847 @kindex --target1-rel
6848 @kindex --target1-abs
6849 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6850 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6851 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6852 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6853
6854 @cindex TARGET2
6855 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6856 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6857 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6858 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6859 @table @samp
6860 @item rel
6861 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6862 @item abs
6863 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6864 @item got-rel
6865 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6866 @end table
6867
6868 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6869 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6870 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6871 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6872 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6873 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6874
6875 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6876 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6877 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6878
6879 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6880 relocations are ignored.
6881
6882 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6883 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6884 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6885 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6886
6887 @smallexample
6888 TST rM, #1
6889 MOVEQ PC, rM
6890 BX Rn
6891 @end smallexample
6892
6893 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6894 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6895 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6896
6897 @cindex USE_BLX
6898 @kindex --use-blx
6899 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6900 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6901 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6902 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6903 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6904
6905 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6906 specify it if you are using that target.
6907
6908 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6909 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6910 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6911 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6912 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6913 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6914 the support code can read the intended values.
6915
6916 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6917 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6918 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6919 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6920 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6921 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6922
6923 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6924 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6925 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6926 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6927 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6928 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6929
6930 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6931 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6932 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6933 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6934 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6935 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6936 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6937
6938 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6939 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6940 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6941 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6942 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6943 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6944 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6945
6946 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6947 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6948 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6949
6950 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6951 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6952
6953 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6954 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6955 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6956 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6957 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6958 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6959 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6960 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6961
6962 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6963 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6964
6965 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6966 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6967 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6968 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6969 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6970
6971 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6972 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6973 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6974 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6975 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6976 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6977
6978 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6979 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6980
6981 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6982 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6983 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6984 occurs.
6985
6986 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6987 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6988 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6989 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6990 occurs.
6991
6992 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6993 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6994 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6995 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6996 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6997 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6998 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6999 not be diagnosed.
7000
7001 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7002 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7003 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7004 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7005 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7006 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7007 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
7008
7009 @cindex PIC_VENEER
7010 @kindex --pic-veneer
7011 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7012 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7013 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7014 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7015
7016 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7017 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7018 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7019 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7020 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7021 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
7022 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
7023 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
7024 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
7025 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7026 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7027 where they should be placed.
7028
7029 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7030 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
7031 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
7032 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7033 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7034 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7035 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7036 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7037 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7038 from the input sections.
7039
7040 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7041 @samp{N = +1}.
7042
7043 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7044 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7045 otherwise.
7046
7047 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7048 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7049 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7050 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7051
7052 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7053
7054 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7055 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7056 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7057 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7058
7059 Please contact ARM for further details.
7060
7061 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7062 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7063 @cindex Merging exidx entries
7064 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7065
7066 @kindex --long-plt
7067 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7068 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7069 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7070 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7071
7072 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7073 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
7074 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7075 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7076
7077 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
7078 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7079 Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
7080 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7081 veneers in memory.
7082
7083 @kindex --cmse-implib
7084 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7085 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7086 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7087 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7088 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7089
7090 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7091 @cindex Input import library
7092 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7093 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7094 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7095 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7096 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7097 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7098 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7099 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7100 specified.
7101
7102 @ifclear GENERIC
7103 @lowersections
7104 @end ifclear
7105 @end ifset
7106
7107 @ifset HPPA
7108 @ifclear GENERIC
7109 @raisesections
7110 @end ifclear
7111
7112 @node HPPA ELF32
7113 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7114 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7115 @kindex --multi-subspace
7116 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7117 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7118 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7119 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7120 multiple sub-spaces.
7121
7122 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7123 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7124 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7125 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7126 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7127 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7128 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7129 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7130 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7131 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7132 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7133 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7134 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7135 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7136 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7137 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7138
7139 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7140 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7141 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7142 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7143
7144 @ifclear GENERIC
7145 @lowersections
7146 @end ifclear
7147 @end ifset
7148
7149 @ifset M68K
7150 @ifclear GENERIC
7151 @raisesections
7152 @end ifclear
7153
7154 @node M68K
7155 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7156
7157 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7158 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7159 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7160 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7161 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7162 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7163 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7164 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7165 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7166 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7167 support such GOTs.
7168 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7169 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7170 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7171 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7172
7173 @ifclear GENERIC
7174 @lowersections
7175 @end ifclear
7176 @end ifset
7177
7178 @ifset MIPS
7179 @ifclear GENERIC
7180 @raisesections
7181 @end ifclear
7182
7183 @node MIPS
7184 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7185
7186 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7187 @kindex --insn32
7188 @kindex --no-insn32
7189 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7190 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7191 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7192 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7193 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7194 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7195
7196 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7197 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7198 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7199 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7200 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7201 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7202 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7203 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7204 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7205 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7206 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7207 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7208
7209 @ifclear GENERIC
7210 @lowersections
7211 @end ifclear
7212 @end ifset
7213
7214 @ifset MMIX
7215 @ifclear GENERIC
7216 @raisesections
7217 @end ifclear
7218
7219 @node MMIX
7220 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7221 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7222 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7223 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7224 can translate between the two formats.
7225
7226 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7227 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7228 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7229 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7230 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7231 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7232 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7233 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7234
7235 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7236 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7237 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7238 of a section.
7239
7240 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7241 are left out from an mmo file.
7242
7243 @ifclear GENERIC
7244 @lowersections
7245 @end ifclear
7246 @end ifset
7247
7248 @ifset MSP430
7249 @ifclear GENERIC
7250 @raisesections
7251 @end ifclear
7252
7253 @node MSP430
7254 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7255 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7256 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7257 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7258
7259 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7260 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7261
7262 @table @code
7263 @item @samp{.vectors}
7264 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7265
7266 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7267 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7268 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7269
7270 @item @samp{.infomem}
7271 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7272 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7273
7274 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7275 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7276 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7277
7278 @item @samp{.noinit}
7279 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7280
7281 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7282 @end table
7283
7284 @table @option
7285 @cindex MSP430 Options
7286 @kindex --code-region
7287 @item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7288 This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7289 argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7290 using this option.
7291
7292 @kindex --data-region
7293 @item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7294 This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7295 [either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7296 for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7297
7298 @kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7299 @item --disable-sec-transformation
7300 Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7301 and @code{--data-region} options.
7302 This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7303 wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7304 not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7305 @end table
7306
7307 @ifclear GENERIC
7308 @lowersections
7309 @end ifclear
7310 @end ifset
7311
7312 @ifset NDS32
7313 @ifclear GENERIC
7314 @raisesections
7315 @end ifclear
7316
7317 @node NDS32
7318 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7319 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7320 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7321 relaxes objects according to these options.
7322
7323 @table @code
7324 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7325 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7326
7327 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7328 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7329
7330 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7331 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7332
7333 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7334 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7335
7336 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7337 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7338
7339 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7340 Update the existing EX9 table.
7341
7342 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7343 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7344
7345 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7346 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7347
7348 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7349 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7350
7351 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7352 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7353 @end table
7354
7355 @ifclear GENERIC
7356 @lowersections
7357 @end ifclear
7358 @end ifset
7359
7360 @ifset NIOSII
7361 @ifclear GENERIC
7362 @raisesections
7363 @end ifclear
7364
7365 @node Nios II
7366 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7367 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7368 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7369
7370 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7371 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7372 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7373 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7374 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7375 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7376 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7377 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7378 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7379 larger than 256MB.
7380
7381 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7382 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7383 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7384 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7385 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7386 register as a temporary.
7387
7388 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7389 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7390 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7391
7392 @ifclear GENERIC
7393 @lowersections
7394 @end ifclear
7395 @end ifset
7396
7397 @ifset POWERPC
7398 @ifclear GENERIC
7399 @raisesections
7400 @end ifclear
7401
7402 @node PowerPC ELF32
7403 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7404 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7405 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7406 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7407 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7408 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7409 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7410 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7411 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7412 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7413 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7414 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7415 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7416
7417 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7418 @table @option
7419 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7420 @kindex --bss-plt
7421 @item --bss-plt
7422 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7423 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7424 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7425 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7426 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7427 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7428 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7429 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7430
7431 @kindex --secure-plt
7432 @item --secure-plt
7433 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7434 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7435 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7436 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7437 style BSS PLT.
7438
7439 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7440 @kindex --sdata-got
7441 @item --sdata-got
7442 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7443 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7444 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7445 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7446 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7447 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7448 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7449 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7450 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7451 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7452 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7453 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7454
7455 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7456 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7457 @item --emit-stub-syms
7458 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7459 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7460
7461 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7462 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7463 @item --no-tls-optimize
7464 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7465 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7466 disable the optimization.
7467 @end table
7468
7469 @ifclear GENERIC
7470 @lowersections
7471 @end ifclear
7472 @end ifset
7473
7474 @ifset POWERPC64
7475 @ifclear GENERIC
7476 @raisesections
7477 @end ifclear
7478
7479 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7480 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7481
7482 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7483 @table @option
7484 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7485 @kindex --stub-group-size
7486 @item --stub-group-size
7487 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7488 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7489 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7490 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7491 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7492 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7493 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7494 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7495 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7496 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7497 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7498 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7499 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7500 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7501
7502 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7503 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7504 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7505 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7506
7507 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7508 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7509 @item --emit-stub-syms
7510 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7511 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7512
7513 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7514 @kindex --dotsyms
7515 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7516 @item --dotsyms
7517 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7518 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7519 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7520 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7521 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7522 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7523 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7524 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7525 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7526 feature.
7527
7528 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7529 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7530 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7531 @item --save-restore-funcs
7532 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7533 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7534 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7535 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7536 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7537 link.
7538
7539 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7540 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7541 @item --no-tls-optimize
7542 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7543 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7544 disable the optimization.
7545
7546 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7547 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7548 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7549 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7550 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7551 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7552 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7553 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7554 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7555 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7556 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7557 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7558 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7559 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7560 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7561
7562 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7563 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7564 @item --no-opd-optimize
7565 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7566 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7567 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7568 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7569
7570 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7571 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7572 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7573 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7574 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7575 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7576 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7577
7578 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7579 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7580 @item --no-toc-optimize
7581 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7582 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7583 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7584 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7585 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7586 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7587 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7588 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7589 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7590 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7591 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7592 optimization.
7593
7594 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7595 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7596 @item --no-multi-toc
7597 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7598 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7599 where TOC
7600 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7601 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7602 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7603 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7604 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7605 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7606 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7607 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7608
7609 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7610 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7611 @item --no-toc-sort
7612 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7613 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7614 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7615 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7616 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7617 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7618 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7619 off this feature.
7620
7621 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7622 @kindex --plt-align
7623 @kindex --no-plt-align
7624 @item --plt-align
7625 @itemx --no-plt-align
7626 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7627 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7628 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7629 specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7630 specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7631 if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7632 PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
7633
7634 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7635 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7636 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7637 @item --plt-static-chain
7638 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7639 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7640 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7641 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7642
7643 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7644 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7645 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7646 @item --plt-thread-safe
7647 @itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
7648 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7649 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7650 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7651 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7652 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7653 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7654 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7655 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7656 default behaviour.
7657
7658 @cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7659 @kindex --plt-localentry
7660 @kindex --no-plt-localentry
7661 @item --plt-localentry
7662 @itemx --no-localentry
7663 ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7664 ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7665 (the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7666 Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7667 or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7668 functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7669 in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
7670 interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7671 including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7672 to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7673 complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7674 care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
7675 @end table
7676
7677 @ifclear GENERIC
7678 @lowersections
7679 @end ifclear
7680 @end ifset
7681
7682 @ifset S/390
7683 @ifclear GENERIC
7684 @raisesections
7685 @end ifclear
7686
7687 @node S/390 ELF
7688 @section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7689
7690 @cindex S/390 ELF options
7691 @table @option
7692
7693 @cindex S/390
7694 @kindex --s390-pgste
7695 @item --s390-pgste
7696 This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7697 segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7698 binaries marked that way.
7699 @end table
7700
7701 @ifclear GENERIC
7702 @lowersections
7703 @end ifclear
7704 @end ifset
7705
7706 @ifset SPU
7707 @ifclear GENERIC
7708 @raisesections
7709 @end ifclear
7710
7711 @node SPU ELF
7712 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7713
7714 @cindex SPU ELF options
7715 @table @option
7716
7717 @cindex SPU plugins
7718 @kindex --plugin
7719 @item --plugin
7720 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7721
7722 @cindex SPU overlays
7723 @kindex --no-overlays
7724 @item --no-overlays
7725 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7726 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7727 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7728 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7729
7730 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7731 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7732 @item --emit-stub-syms
7733 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7734 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7735
7736 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7737 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7738 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7739 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7740 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7741 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7742
7743 @cindex SPU local store size
7744 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7745 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7746 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7747 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7748 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7749
7750 @cindex SPU
7751 @kindex --stack-analysis
7752 @item --stack-analysis
7753 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7754 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7755 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7756 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7757 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7758 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7759 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7760 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7761 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7762 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7763 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7764 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7765 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7766 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7767 and calls will be given.
7768
7769 @cindex SPU
7770 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7771 @item --emit-stack-syms
7772 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7773 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7774 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7775 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7776 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7777 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7778 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7779 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7780 @end table
7781
7782 @ifclear GENERIC
7783 @lowersections
7784 @end ifclear
7785 @end ifset
7786
7787 @ifset TICOFF
7788 @ifclear GENERIC
7789 @raisesections
7790 @end ifclear
7791
7792 @node TI COFF
7793 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7794 @cindex TI COFF versions
7795 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7796 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7797 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7798 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7799 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7800 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7801
7802 @ifclear GENERIC
7803 @lowersections
7804 @end ifclear
7805 @end ifset
7806
7807 @ifset WIN32
7808 @ifclear GENERIC
7809 @raisesections
7810 @end ifclear
7811
7812 @node WIN32
7813 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7814
7815 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7816 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7817 command line options mentioned here.
7818
7819 @table @emph
7820 @cindex import libraries
7821 @item import libraries
7822 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7823 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7824 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7825 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7826 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7827 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7828
7829 @item exporting DLL symbols
7830 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7831 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7832
7833 @table @emph
7834 @item using auto-export functionality
7835 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7836 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7837 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7838
7839 @itemize
7840 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7841 @item --exclude-symbols
7842 @item --exclude-libs
7843 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7844 @item --version-script
7845 @end itemize
7846
7847 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7848 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7849 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7850 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7851 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7852 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7853 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7854 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7855
7856 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7857 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7858 if either of the following are true:
7859
7860 @itemize
7861 @item A DEF file is used.
7862 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7863 @end itemize
7864
7865 @item using a DEF file
7866 @cindex using a DEF file
7867 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7868 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7869 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7870 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7871 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7872
7873 @example
7874 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7875 @end example
7876
7877 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7878 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7879
7880 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7881
7882 @example
7883 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7884
7885 EXPORTS
7886 foo
7887 bar
7888 _bar = bar
7889 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7890 var1 DATA
7891 doo = foo == foo2
7892 eoo DATA == var1
7893 @end example
7894
7895 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7896 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7897 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7898 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7899 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7900 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7901 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7902 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7903 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7904
7905 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7906 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7907 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7908
7909 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7910 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7911 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7912 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7913
7914 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7915 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7916 non-default base address for the image.
7917
7918 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7919 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7920 filename specified on the command line.
7921
7922 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7923
7924 @example
7925 EXPORTS
7926 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7927 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7928 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7929 @end example
7930
7931 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7932 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7933 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7934 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7935 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7936 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7937 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7938
7939 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7940
7941 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7942 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7943 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7944 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7945 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7946
7947 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7948 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7949 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7950 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7951
7952 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7953 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7954 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7955 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7956 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7957 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7958 application will behave unexpectedly.
7959
7960 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7961 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7962 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7963 API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7964 the DLL without an import library.
7965
7966 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7967 other DEF file statements
7968
7969 @cindex creating a DEF file
7970 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7971 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7972
7973 @item Using decorations
7974 @cindex Using decorations
7975 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7976 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7977 declared as:
7978
7979 @example
7980 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7981 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7982 @end example
7983
7984 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7985 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7986 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7987 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7988
7989 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7990 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7991 instead:
7992
7993 @example
7994 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7995 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7996 @end example
7997
7998 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7999 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
8000 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8001 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
8002 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
8003 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8004 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
8005 information.
8006 @end table
8007
8008 @cindex automatic data imports
8009 @item automatic data imports
8010 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
8011 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
8012 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
8013 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
8014 code to these platforms, especially for large
8015 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
8016 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
8017 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
8018 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
8019 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8020 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8021 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8022 trigger the feature's use.
8023
8024 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
8025 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8026
8027 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
8028 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8029
8030 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8031 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8032 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
8033 below.
8034
8035 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
8036 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8037 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8038 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8039 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8040 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
8041 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
8042 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
8043 references.
8044
8045 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8046 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8047 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8048 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8049 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8050 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
8051 run without error on an older system.
8052
8053 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8054 enabled as needed.
8055
8056 @cindex direct linking to a dll
8057 @item direct linking to a dll
8058 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8059 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
8060 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
8061 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
8062 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8063 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8064 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
8065 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
8066 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
8067 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8068
8069 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
8070 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
8071 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
8072 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8073 select the dll instead of an import library.
8074
8075
8076 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8077 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
8078
8079 @example
8080 libxxx.dll.a
8081 xxx.dll.a
8082 libxxx.a
8083 xxx.lib
8084 libxxx.lib
8085 cygxxx.dll (*)
8086 libxxx.dll
8087 xxx.dll
8088 @end example
8089
8090 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8091
8092 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8093 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8094 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8095 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
8096 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8097
8098 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8099 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
8100 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8101 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8102 could coexist on the same machine.
8103
8104 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8105 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
8106 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
8107
8108 @example
8109 bin/
8110 cygxxx.dll
8111 lib/
8112 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
8113 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
8114 @end example
8115
8116 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8117 done two ways:
8118
8119 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8120 @example
8121 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8122 @end example
8123
8124 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8125 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8126 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8127 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8128
8129 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8130 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8131 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8132 making the app/dll.
8133
8134 @example
8135 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8136 @end example
8137
8138 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8139
8140 @example
8141 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8142 @end example
8143
8144 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8145 perfectly legal
8146
8147 @example
8148 bin/
8149 cygxxx-5.dll
8150 lib/
8151 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8152 @end example
8153
8154 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8155 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8156 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8157
8158 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8159 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8160
8161 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8162 work with auto-imported data.
8163
8164 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8165 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8166 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8167 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8168 possible to do this without an import lib.
8169
8170 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8171 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8172 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8173 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8174
8175 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8176 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8177 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8178 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8179 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8180 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8181 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8182
8183 @item symbol aliasing
8184 @table @emph
8185 @item adding additional names
8186 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8187 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8188 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8189 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8190 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8191
8192 @example
8193 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8194
8195 EXPORTS
8196 foo
8197 _foo = foo
8198 @end example
8199
8200 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8201
8202 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8203 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8204
8205 @example
8206 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8207 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8208 @end example
8209
8210 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8211 symbols.
8212
8213 @item renaming symbols
8214 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8215 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8216 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8217 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8218 created). In the following example:
8219
8220 @example
8221 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8222
8223 EXPORTS
8224 _foo = foo
8225 @end example
8226
8227 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8228 @samp{_foo}.
8229 @end table
8230
8231 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8232 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
8233 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8234 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8235 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8236 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8237 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8238 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8239 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8240 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8241 which is probably not what you wanted.
8242
8243 @cindex weak externals
8244 @item weak externals
8245 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8246 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8247 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8248 are three variants of weak externals:
8249 @itemize
8250 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8251 called lazy externals.
8252 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8253 This form is not presently implemented.
8254 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8255 implemented.
8256 @end itemize
8257 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8258 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8259 uses a default value.
8260
8261 @cindex aligned common symbols
8262 @item aligned common symbols
8263 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8264 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8265 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8266 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8267 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8268 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8269 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8270 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8271
8272 @end table
8273
8274 @ifclear GENERIC
8275 @lowersections
8276 @end ifclear
8277 @end ifset
8278
8279 @ifset XTENSA
8280 @ifclear GENERIC
8281 @raisesections
8282 @end ifclear
8283
8284 @node Xtensa
8285 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8286
8287 @cindex Xtensa processors
8288 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8289 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8290 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8291 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8292 example, with the command:
8293
8294 @smallexample
8295 SECTIONS
8296 @{
8297 .text : @{
8298 *(.literal .text)
8299 @}
8300 @}
8301 @end smallexample
8302
8303 @noindent
8304 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8305 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8306 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8307 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8308 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8309 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8310 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8311
8312 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8313 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8314 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8315 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8316 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8317 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8318 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8319 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8320 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8321 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8322 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8323 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8324
8325 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8326 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8327 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8328 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8329 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8330 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8331 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8332 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8333 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8334 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8335 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8336 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8337 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8338 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8339
8340 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8341 control the linker:
8342
8343 @cindex Xtensa options
8344 @table @option
8345 @item --size-opt
8346 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8347 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8348 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8349 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8350 preserve the correctness of the code.
8351 @end table
8352
8353 @ifclear GENERIC
8354 @lowersections
8355 @end ifclear
8356 @end ifset
8357
8358 @ifclear SingleFormat
8359 @node BFD
8360 @chapter BFD
8361
8362 @cindex back end
8363 @cindex object file management
8364 @cindex object formats available
8365 @kindex objdump -i
8366 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8367 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8368 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8369 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8370 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8371 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8372 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8373 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8374 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8375
8376 @cindex BFD requirements
8377 @cindex requirements for BFD
8378 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8379 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8380 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8381 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8382 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8383 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8384 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8385
8386 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8387 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8388 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8389 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8390
8391 @menu
8392 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8393 @end menu
8394
8395 @node BFD outline
8396 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8397 @cindex opening object files
8398 @include bfdsumm.texi
8399 @end ifclear
8400
8401 @node Reporting Bugs
8402 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8403 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8404 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8405
8406 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8407
8408 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8409 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8410 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8411 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8412 @command{ld}.
8413
8414 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8415 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8416
8417 @menu
8418 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8419 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8420 @end menu
8421
8422 @node Bug Criteria
8423 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8424 @cindex bug criteria
8425
8426 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8427
8428 @itemize @bullet
8429 @cindex fatal signal
8430 @cindex linker crash
8431 @cindex crash of linker
8432 @item
8433 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8434 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8435
8436 @cindex error on valid input
8437 @item
8438 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8439
8440 @cindex invalid input
8441 @item
8442 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8443 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8444 object files are correct.
8445
8446 @item
8447 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8448 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8449 @end itemize
8450
8451 @node Bug Reporting
8452 @section How to Report Bugs
8453 @cindex bug reports
8454 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8455
8456 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8457 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8458 recommend you contact that organization first.
8459
8460 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8461 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8462 distribution.
8463
8464 @ifset BUGURL
8465 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8466 @value{BUGURL}.
8467 @end ifset
8468
8469 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8470 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8471 fact or leave it out, state it!
8472
8473 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8474 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8475 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8476 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8477 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8478 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8479 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8480 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8481 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8482 and the most helpful.
8483
8484 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8485 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8486 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8487
8488 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8489 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8490 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8491 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8492
8493 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8494
8495 @itemize @bullet
8496 @item
8497 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8498 the @samp{--version} argument.
8499
8500 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8501 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8502
8503 @item
8504 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8505 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8506
8507 @item
8508 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8509 version number.
8510
8511 @item
8512 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8513 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8514
8515 @item
8516 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8517 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8518 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8519 sufficient.
8520
8521 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8522 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8523
8524 @item
8525 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8526 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8527 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8528 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8529 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8530 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8531 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8532 attachments are best.
8533
8534 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8535 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8536 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8537 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8538 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8539
8540 @item
8541 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8542 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8543
8544 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8545 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8546 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8547 a chance to make a mistake.
8548
8549 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8550 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8551 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8552 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8553 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8554 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8555 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8556 any conclusion from our observations.
8557
8558 @item
8559 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8560 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8561 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8562 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8563 context, not by line number.
8564
8565 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8566 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8567 @end itemize
8568
8569 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8570
8571 @itemize @bullet
8572 @item
8573 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8574
8575 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8576 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8577 changes will not affect it.
8578
8579 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8580 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8581 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8582 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8583
8584 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8585 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8586 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8587 less time, and so on.
8588
8589 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8590 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8591
8592 @item
8593 A patch for the bug.
8594
8595 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8596 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8597 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8598 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8599
8600 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8601 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8602 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8603 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8604 fixed.
8605
8606 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8607 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8608 help us to understand.
8609
8610 @item
8611 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8612
8613 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8614 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8615 @end itemize
8616
8617 @node MRI
8618 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8619 @cindex MRI compatibility
8620 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8621 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8622 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8623 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8624 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8625 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8626 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8627
8628 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8629 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8630 features to make use of them.
8631
8632 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8633 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8634
8635 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8636 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8637 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8638 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8639 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8640
8641 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8642
8643 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8644 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8645 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8646
8647 @table @code
8648 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8649 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8650 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8651 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8652 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8653 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8654 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8655 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8656 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8657 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8658 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8659
8660 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8661 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8662 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8663 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8664
8665 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8666
8667 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8668 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8669 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8670 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8671
8672 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8673 @item BASE @var{expression}
8674 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8675 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8676
8677 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8678 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8679 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8680 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8681
8682 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8683 @item END
8684 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8685
8686 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8687 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8688 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8689 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8690
8691 @enumerate
8692 @item
8693 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8694
8695 @item
8696 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8697
8698 @item
8699 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8700 @samp{COFF}
8701 @end enumerate
8702
8703 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8704 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8705 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8706 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8707
8708 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8709 same line, with no change in its effect.
8710
8711 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8712 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8713 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8714 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8715 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8716 command line.
8717
8718 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8719 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8720 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8721 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8722 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8723
8724 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8725 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8726 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8727 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8728 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8729 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8730 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8731 file, in the order specified.
8732
8733 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8734 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8735 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8736 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8737 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8738 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8739
8740 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8741 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8742 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8743 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8744 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8745 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8746 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8747 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8748 @end table
8749
8750 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8751 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8752 @include fdl.texi
8753
8754 @node LD Index
8755 @unnumbered LD Index
8756
8757 @printindex cp
8758
8759 @tex
8760 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8761 % meantime:
8762 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8763 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8764 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8765 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8766 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8767 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8768 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8769 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8770 \page\colophon
8771 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8772 @end tex
8773
8774 @bye
This page took 0.222897 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.